17378
282
Verklein
Vergroot
Pagina terug
1/284
Pagina verder
EL-9900
MODEL
EL-9900 GRAPHING CALCULATOR
GRAPHING CALCULATOR
OPERATION MANUAL
SHARP CORPORATION
02CGK(TINSE0511EHZZ)
PRINTED IN CHINA/IMPRIMÉ EN CHINE/IMPRESO EN CHINA
®
®
Declaration of Conformity
Graphing Calculator: EL-9900
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept
any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Responsible Party:
SHARP ELECTRONICS CORPORATION
Sharp Plaza, Mahwah, New Jersey 07430-1163
TEL: 1-800-BE-SHARP
Tested To Comply With FCC Standards
FOR HOME OR OFFICE USE
WARNING — FCC Regulations state that any unauthorized changes or modifications to this
equipment not expressly approved by the manufacturer could void the user’s authority to
operate this equipment.
Note: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital
device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a
residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy
and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interfer-
ence to radio communications.
However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this
equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be
determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the
interference by one or more of the following measures:
— Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
— Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
— Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is
connected.
— Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
In the U.S.A.
Note: A shielded interface cable is required to ensure compliance with FCC regulations for Class B
certification.
FOR YOUR RECORDS...
For your assistance in reporting this product in case of loss or theft, please
record the model number and serial number which are located on the bottom
of the unit.
Please retain this information.
Model Number
Serial Number
Date of Purchase
Place of Purchase
i
Intr oduction
This graphing calculator can handle many types of mathematical formulas and
expressions for you. It is powerful enough to process very complex formulas used in
rocket science, but yet so compact that it fits in your coat pocket. The main features of
this graphing calculator are as follows:
•Reversible Keyboard to suit the needs of students’ levels, ranging from middle-
school level arithmetic to high-school calculus, and beyond,
•Graphing Capability to help you visualize what you are working on,
Slide Show Function to help you understand common formulas, prepare for presen-
tations,
Large memory capacity, with fast processing speed, and more.
We strongly recommend you read this manual thoroughly. If not, then browse through
the very first chapter “Getting Started”, at least. Last, but not least, congratulations on
purchasing the Graphing Calculator!
NOTICE
The material in this manual is supplied without representation or warranty of any
kind. SHARP assumes no responsibility and shall have no liability of any kind,
consequential or otherwise, from the use of this material.
SHARP strongly recommends that separate permanent written records be kept of all
important data. Data may be lost or altered in virtually any electronic memory
product under certain circumstances. Therefore, SHARP assumes no responsibility
for data lost or otherwise rendered unusable whether as a result of improper use,
repairs, defects, battery replacement, use after the specified battery life has expired,
or any other cause.
SHARP assumes no responsibility, directly or indirectly, for financial losses or claims
from third persons resulting from the use of this product and any of its functions, the
loss of or alteration of stored data, etc.
The information provided in this manual is subject to change without notice.
Screens and keys shown in this manual may differ from the actual ones on the
calculator.
Some of the accessories and optional parts described in this manual may not be
available at the time you purchase this product.
Some of the accessories and optional parts described in this manual may be
unavailable in some countries.
All company and/or product names are trademarks and/or registered trademarks of
their respective holders.
ii
Introduction
Reversible Keyboard
This calculator comes equipped with a reversible keyboard. Reverse the keyboard to
select Basic Mode or Advanced Mode.
Basic Mode
A green background color keyboard with basic mathematical functions. This mode is
suitable for learning mathematics in lower grades.
iii
Introduction
Advanced Mode (Default mode)
A blue background color keyboard with advanced mathematical functions. This mode
is suitable for learning or studying mathematics in higher grades.
iv
Contents
Caring for Your Calculator ...............................................................................................1
Chapter 1
Getting Started .............................................................................................................. 2
Before Use ......................................................................................................................2
Using the Hard Cover .....................................................................................................3
Part Names and Functions .............................................................................................4
Main Unit .................................................................................................................4
Reversible Keyboard ...............................................................................................6
Basic Key Operations .....................................................................................................8
Changing the Keyboard ..................................................................................................9
Quick Run-through: Basic Mode...................................................................................10
Chapter 2
Operating the Graphing Calculator ......................................................................... 13
Basic / Advanced Keyboard..........................................................................................13
Basic Key Operations - Standard Calculation Keys .....................................................13
1. Entering numbers .............................................................................................14
2. Performing standard math calculations ............................................................15
Cursor Basics ...............................................................................................................15
Editing Entries ..............................................................................................................17
Second Function Key....................................................................................................18
ALPHA Key ...................................................................................................................19
Math Function Keys ......................................................................................................20
MATH, STAT, and PRGM Menu Keys ...........................................................................23
SETUP Menu ................................................................................................................ 24
SETUP Menu Items ......................................................................................................25
Precedence of Calculations ..........................................................................................27
Error Messages ............................................................................................................ 28
Resetting the Calculator ...............................................................................................29
1. Using the reset switch ....................................................................................... 29
2. Selecting the RESET within the OPTION menu ..............................................30
Chapter 3
Basic Calculations — Basic Keyboard.................................................................... 31
1. Tr y it! ........................................................................................................................31
2. Arithmetic Keys .......................................................................................................33
3. Calculations Using Various Function Keys .............................................................35
4. Calculations Using MATH Menu Items ...................................................................42
v
Contents
Chapter 4
Basic Graphing Features — Basic Keyboard ......................................................... 50
1. Tr y it! ........................................................................................................................50
2. Explanations of Various Graphing Keys ................................................................. 52
3. Other Useful Graphing Features .............................................................................58
Substitution feature ............................................................................................... 63
Chapter 5
Advanced Calculations — Advanced Keyboard .................................................... 66
1. Tr y it! ........................................................................................................................66
2. Various Calculation Keys ........................................................................................ 67
3. Calculations Using MATH Menu .............................................................................70
4. More Variables: Single Value Variables and LIST Variables ................................... 80
5. TOOL Menu .............................................................................................................81
6. SETUP Menu ..........................................................................................................83
Chapter 6
Advanced Graphing Features — Advanced Keyboard .......................................... 84
1. Tr y it! ........................................................................................................................84
2. Graphing Parametric Equations .............................................................................. 87
3. Polar Graphing ........................................................................................................88
4. Graphing Sequences ..............................................................................................89
5. The CALC Function ................................................................................................93
6. Format Setting ........................................................................................................95
7. Zoom Functions ......................................................................................................96
8. Setting a Window ....................................................................................................98
9. Tables ......................................................................................................................99
10. The DRAW Function .............................................................................................102
11. Substitution Feature ..............................................................................................114
Chapter 7
SLIDE SHOW Feature .............................................................................................. 115
1. Tr y it! ..................................................................................................................... 115
2. The SLIDE SHOW menu ......................................................................................118
Chapter 8
Matrix Features ........................................................................................................ 120
1. Tr y it! ..................................................................................................................... 120
2. Entering and Viewing a Matrix ............................................................................. 122
Editing keys and functions ..................................................................................123
3. Normal Matrix Operations ..................................................................................... 124
4. Special Matrix Operations.....................................................................................125
Calculations using OPE menus ......................................................................... 125
Calculations using MATH menus ....................................................................... 129
Use of [ ] menus..................................................................................................130
vi
Contents
Chapter 9
List Features ............................................................................................................ 131
1. Tr y it! ..................................................................................................................... 131
2. Creating a list ....................................................................................................... 133
3. Normal List Operations .........................................................................................133
4. Special List Operations .........................................................................................135
Calculations using the OPE menu functions ..................................................... 135
Calculations using MATH Menus ....................................................................... 139
5. Drawing multiple graphs using the list function ................................................... 141
6. Using L_DATA functions ........................................................................................142
7. Using List Table to Enter or Edit Lists .................................................................. 143
How to enter the list ............................................................................................143
How to edit the list ..............................................................................................144
Chapter 10
Statistics & Regression Calculations.................................................................... 145
1. Tr y it! ..................................................................................................................... 145
2. Statistics Features ................................................................................................149
1. STAT menus ..................................................................................................149
2. Statistical evaluations available under the C CALC menu .......................... 150
3. Graphing the statistical data ................................................................................ 153
1. Graph Types ..................................................................................................153
2. Specifying statistical graph and graph functions ......................................... 157
3. Statistical plotting on/off function ................................................................. 157
4. Trace function of statistical graphs .............................................................. 158
4. Data list operations ...............................................................................................159
5. Regression Calculations .......................................................................................160
6. Statistical Hypothesis Testing .............................................................................. 165
7. Distribution functions ............................................................................................177
Chapter 11
Financial Features ................................................................................................... 183
1. Tr y it! 1.................................................................................................................. 183
Tr y it! 2.................................................................................................................. 187
2. CALC functions .....................................................................................................189
3. VARS Menu .......................................................................................................... 193
Chapter 12
The SOLVER Feature ................................................................................................ 194
1. Three Analysis Methods: Equation, Newton, and Graphic .................................. 194
2. Saving/Renaming Equations for Later Use ......................................................... 200
3. Recalling a Previously Saved Equation ............................................................... 201
vii
Contents
Chapter 13
Programming Features ........................................................................................... 202
1. Tr y it! ..................................................................................................................... 202
2. Programming Hints ...............................................................................................204
3. Variables .............................................................................................................. 206
Setting a variable ................................................................................................206
4. Operands ............................................................................................................. 206
Comparison operands ........................................................................................206
5. Programming commands ......................................................................................207
A PRGM menu ....................................................................................................207
B BRNCH menu ..................................................................................................209
C SCRN menu ....................................................................................................209
D I/O menu......................................................................................................... 209
E SETUP menu ..................................................................................................210
F FORMAT menu ................................................................................................211
G S_PLOT menu ................................................................................................213
6. Flow control tools ..................................................................................................214
7. Other menus convenient for programming .......................................................... 216
H COPY menu ....................................................................................................216
VARS menu ....................................................................................................... 217
8. Debugging ............................................................................................................ 219
9. Sample programs .................................................................................................. 220
Chapter 14
OPTION Menu ........................................................................................................... 222
Accessing the OPTION Menu ....................................................................................222
1. Adjusting the screen contrast ...................................................................... 222
2. Checking the memory usage ....................................................................... 222
3. Deleting files..................................................................................................224
4. Linking to another EL-9900 or PC ............................................................... 224
5. Reset function ...............................................................................................227
Appendix................................................................................................................... 228
1. Replacing Batteries ...............................................................................................228
2. Troubleshooting Guide ..........................................................................................231
3. Specifications ....................................................................................................... 233
4. Error Codes and Error Messages ........................................................................ 235
5. Error Conditions Relating to Specific Tasks ........................................................ 237
1. Financial ....................................................................................................... 237
2. Error conditions during financial calculations .............................................. 239
3. Distribution function ......................................................................................239
6. Calculation Range .................................................................................................241
1. Arithmetic calculation ....................................................................................241
2. Function calculation ......................................................................................241
viii
Contents
3. Complex number calculation ........................................................................ 245
7. CATALOG Feature ................................................................................................246
8. List of Menu/Sub-menu Items .............................................................................. 247
1. MATH menus .................................................................................................247
2. LIST menus ................................................................................................... 249
3. STAT menus ..................................................................................................251
4. STAT PLOT menus ........................................................................................253
5. DRAW menus ................................................................................................ 254
6. ZOOM menus ................................................................................................255
7. CALC menus .................................................................................................257
8. SLIDE SHOW menus ....................................................................................258
9. PRGM menus ................................................................................................258
10. MATRIX menus .............................................................................................261
11. FINANCE menus ...........................................................................................262
12. TOOL menus .................................................................................................263
13. SOLVER menus ............................................................................................264
INDEX ........................................................................................................................ 265
1
Caring for Your Calculator
Caring for Your Calculator
Do not carry the calculator around in your back pocket, as it
may break when you sit down. The display is made of glass and
is particularly fragile.
•Keep the calculator away from extreme heat such as on a car
dashboard or near a heater, and avoid exposing it to exces-
sively humid or dusty environments.
Since this product is not waterproof, do not use it or store it
where fluids, for example water, can splash onto it. Raindrops,
water spray, juice, coffee, steam, perspiration, etc. will also
cause malfunction.
Clean with a soft, dry cloth. Do not use solvents.
Do not use a sharp pointed object or exert too much force when
pressing keys.
•Avoid excessive physical stress.
2
Chapter 1
Getting Started
Before Use
1. Open the battery cover
located on the back of the
calculator. Pull down the
notch, then lift the battery
cover up to remove it.
2. Insert the batteries, as
indicated. Make sure that the
batteries are inserted in the
correct directions.
3. Pull off the insulation sheet
from the memory backup
battery.
4. Place the battery cover
back, and make sure that the
notch is snapped on.
5. Press O and you will
see the following message on the display:
PRESS [CL] KEY TO CLEAR ALL DATA
PRESS [ON] KEY TO CANCEL
Note: If the above message does not appear, check the direction of the
batteries and close the cover again. If this does not solve the
problem, follow the instruction described in "Resetting the
Calculator - 1. Using the reset switch" on page 29.
6. Press C to reset the calculator’s memory. The memory will
be initialized. Press any key to set the calculator ready for
normal calculation mode.
Inserting
batteries -
resetting the
memory
3
Chapter 1: Getting Started
Since the display contrast may vary with the ambient temperature
and/or remaining battery power, you may want to adjust the
contrast accordingly. Here’s how:
1. Press @, then p.
2. Adjust the contrast by using the + and - keys.
+: increases the contrast
-: decreases the contrast
3. When done, press C to exit the mode.
To open the cover: When in use:
When not in use:
Press @ o to turn the calculator off.
Automatic power off function
The calculator is automatically turned off when there is no key
operation for approximately 10 minutes (The power-off time
depends on the conditions.)
The calculator will not automatically power off while it is
executing calculations (“
flashes on the upper right corner of
the display.)
Using the Hard Cover
Adjusting
display contrast
Turning the
calculator OFF
4
Chapter 1: Getting Started
Part Names and Functions
Main Unit
1 Display screen
2 Power ON/
OFF key
5 Cursor keys
3 Key operation
keys
4 Graphing keys
5
Chapter 1: Getting Started
1 Display screen:
Displays up to 132 pixels wide by 64 pixels tall of graphs and texts.
2 Power ON/OFF key:
Tu r ns calculator ON. To turn off the calculator, press @, then o.
3 Key operation keys:
These keys are used to change the key functions.
@: Changes the cursor to “2”, and the next keystroke enters the
function or mode printed above each key in yellow.
A: Changes the cursor to “A”, and the next keystroke enters the
alphabetical letter printed above each key in purple.
Note: Press @ . to lock the specific keys in the alphabet
entering mode. (ALPHA-LOCK)
4 Graphing keys:
These keys specify settings for the graphing-related mode.
Y: Opens the formula input screen for drawing graphs.
G:Draws a graph based on the formulas programmed in the Y
window.
T: Opens a Table based on the formulas programmed in Y.
W: Sets the display ranges for the graph screen.
Z: Changes the display range of the graph screen.
U: Places the cursor pointer on the graph for tracing, and displays
the coordinates.
,: Displays the substitution feature.
": Displays both a graph and a table at the same time.
y: Opens the table setup screen.
d:Draws items on the graph. Use this key also to save or recall the
graph/pixel data.
f: Sets the operations of the graph screen.
k: Calculates specific values based on formulas programmed in
Y
6
Chapter 1: Getting Started
Basic keyboard Advanced keyboard
Basic Operation keys
E: Used when executing calculations or specifying commands.
C / q: Clear/Quit key
B: Backspace delete key
D: Delete key
i:Toggle input mode between insert and overwrite (in one-line edit
mode).
;: Allows you to set up the basic behavior of this calculator, such as
to set answers in scientific or normal notation.
5 Cursor keys:
Enables you to move the cursor (appears as _,
, etc. on the screen) in four
directions. Use these keys also to select items in the menu.
Reset switch (in the battery compartment):
Used when replacing batteries or clear the calculator memory.
# key: Returns calculator to calculation screen.
p key: Sets or resets the calculator settings, such as LCD contrast and memory
usage.
n key: Obtains the screen for the slide show.
l key: Accesses list features.
] key: Creates your own slide shows.
[ key: Sets the statistical plotting.
Reversible Keyboard
7
Chapter 1: Getting Started
Menu keys (Function of these keys may vary between basic and advanced mode.)
M: Enter the Math menu with additional mathematical functions.
S: Enter the statistics menu.
P: Enter the programming menu.
z: Enter the menu for calculator specific variables.
Advanced Mode specific keys
V: Converts hexadecimal, decimal, octal and binary numbers or
solves systems of linear equations, finds roots for quadratic and
cubic equations.
m: Enter menu for matrix functions
': Enter screen and menu for Solver features
g: Enter menu for financial solver and functions
Scientific Calculation keys (See each chapter for details.)
Basic Mode specific keys
Q / / / < / >:
Fraction calculation keys
i: Integer division and remainder calculation keys
%:Percentage calculation key
* In Advanced mode, you can access above functions from
CATALOG menu.
Advanced Mode specific keys
s / c / t / s / c / t:
Trigonometric function keys
l / I / 0 / @:
Logarithm and exponential functions.
8
Chapter 1: Getting Started
Basic Key Operations
Since this calculator has more than one function assigned to each key, you will need
to follow a few steps to get the function you need.
Example
Press “as is” to get the function and number printed on each key.
•To access secondary function printed above each key in yellow, press
@ first, then press the key. Press C to cancel.
•To press the key printed above each key in purple, press A first,
then press the key. When in Menu selection screen however, you do
not have to press A to access the characters. Press C to
cancel.
If you want enter alphabetical letters (purple) sequentially, use @
.. Press A to return to the normal mode.
In this manual, alphanumeric characters to be entered are indicated
as they are (without using the key symbols). Use of the key symbol
indicates that it is for selecting the menu specified by the character or
number. The above example also indicates the key notation rules of
this manual.
@ x: Specify x
-1
Operation of yA F: Specify character F
y: Specify x
2
x
-1
F
9
Chapter 1: Getting Started
Changing the Keyboard
This calculator is designed with a reversible keyboard, which by utilizing it will not only
change the appearance, but will also change the internal functions and configurations
of the calculator as well.
1. Press @ o to turn off the calculator’s power.
2. Open the battery
compartment cover.
Hold the calculator as
illustrated.
3. Slide the keyboard eject
tab (KEYBOARD
EJECT) down.
The keyboard will be
ejected.
Be careful not to drop
the keyboard on the floor, as this may damage it.
4. Turn the keyboard
over, and replace in
the calculator as
illustrated. Secure by
gently pressing the
keyboard until you
hear the notch click.
Note: Clean the edges and contact points of the keyboard and the
keyboard tap before reattaching the keyboard to the main unit.
DO NOT touch the pad portion in the keyboard tap.
5. Replace the battery compartment cover.
6. Press O.
7. Make sure that the message
shown on the right appears.
8. Press O.
To change the
keyboard:
10
Chapter 1: Getting Started
Here are the major ingredients for 18 doughnuts:
1
4
cup warm water
3
4
cup warm milk
1
3
cup sugar
4 cups all-purpose flour
2 eggs
3 tablespoons butter
Based on these values, solve the following problems using the calculator.
Question If you make 60 doughnuts according to the above recipe,
how many cups of warm milk are required?
At first, you may calculate how many cups of warm milk are
required for 1 doughnut =
3
4
÷ 18
As for the ordinary calculator, the answer is 0.041666666. But
how much is 0.04166666 of a cup of warm milk? The Basic mode
of this graphing calculator is initially set to the fraction answer
mode instead of the decimal answer mode. You may easily obtain
the answer in fraction.
Quick Run-through: Basic Mode
When you reverse the keyboard, the following settings are automatically changed.
Basic Advanced
Simplifying: Auto (Auto at SIMPLE in SETUP menu)
Advanced Basic
Coordinate system: Rectangular coordinates (Rect at COORD
in SETUP menu.)
Answer mode: Displays a mixed number if ANSWER is set to
complex numbers.
Angle unit: Set to Deg if DRG is set to Grad.
Decimal format: Set to FloatPt if FSE is set to Eng.
11
Chapter 1: Getting Started
3. Press 3 b 4 '.
4. Press b 18 '.
5. Press E.
1. Press # to enter the
calculation screen.
2. Press C to clear the
display.
Now we have found
1
24
of a cup of warm milk is required per one
doughnut, how many cups are required for 60 doughnuts?
If you want to use the answer of the previous calculation, press
b and you do not have to reenter the value.
6. Press @ b |, or directly | (multiplication).
“Ans×is displayed. ANS is a calculator specific variable which
indicates the answer of calculations just before.
* When you enter
+ (addition), (subtraction), × (multiplication),
÷ (division), it is not required to press b.
7. Press 60.
8. Press E.
Answer:
1
2
2
cups of warm milk are required for making 60 doughnuts.
Enter fractions
Set up the
calculator
before
calculation
12
Chapter 1: Getting Started
On the Basic Mode, you can toggle between decimal values,
mixed values, and improper fractions using >, /, and
<, respectively.
1. Press > E.
2. Press < E.
3. Press / E.
1. Press @ ;.
2. Select F ANSWER and
press 1.
3. Press C.
Now the answer mode is set to the decimal answer mode and 2.5
is displayed.
Change answer
mode from
fractions to
decimals
13
Chapter 2
Operating the Graphing
Calculator
Basic / Advanced Keyboard
This calculator comes equipped with a reversible keyboard to support two different
keyboard configurations: Basic and Advanced keyboard. By reversing the keyboard,
the calculator switches its set of functions and behaviors as well as its visual aspect.
The Basic keyboard, with its key frame colored in dark green, is designed to be used
by students at lower grades of math classes. Functions associated with complex
calculations, such as matrix functions and various trigonometric functions, are not
included in this layout to avoid confusing students. Menu items are also carefully
chosen to meet the educational needs of the students at lower grades.
With the Advanced keyboard however, all functions and features are accessible for
higher grade math students and various professionals in the fields of architecture,
finance, mathematics, and physics.
How to switch the keyboard
See page 9.
Basic Key Operations - Standard Calculation Keys
The standard calculation keys, located at the bottom four rows of the keyboard,
enable you to access the basic functions of the calculator.
14
Chapter 2: Operating the Graphing Calculator
1. Entering numbers
Use the number keys (0 ~ 9), decimal point key (.), and negative
number key (_) to enter numbers into the calculator. To clear the screen entry,
press C.
Example
Type 10.23456789 onto the
Calculation screen.
1. Enter the Calculation screen,
then clear the screen entry:
# C
2. Enter numbers with the number keys and decimal point key, as
follows:
10 . 23456789
Note: $ can be used to enter a value in scientific notation.
Example
6.3
× 10
8
+ 4.9 × 10
7
# C 6.3 $ 8 + 4.9
$ 7
The negative number key _ can be used to enter numbers,
lists, and functions with negative values. Press _ before
entering the value.
Note: Do not use the - key to specify a negative value. Doing so
will result in an error.
Example
Type -9460.827513 into the
Calculation screen.
# C _ 9460.827513
Number entry
Entering a
negative value
15
Chapter 2: Operating the Graphing Calculator
2. Performing standard math calculations
By utilizing the + - | and = keys, you can perform the standard
arithmetic calculations of addition, subtraction, multiplication, and division. Press
E to perform each calculation.
Example
Obtain the answer to “6
× 5 + 3
2”.
# C 6 | 5 + 3
- 2 E
With the ( and ) keys, parentheses (round brackets)
can be added to group sections of expressions. Sections within
the parentheses will be calculated first. Parentheses can also be
used to close the passings of values in various functions, such as
“ipart 3.14”.
Example
Obtain the answer to “(9
+ 7) ×
(5 3)”.
# C ( 9 + 7
) | ( 5 - 3
) E
Note: The multiplication sign
×”, as the one in the above example, can
be abbreviated if it proceeds a math function, a parenthesis “(”, or
a variable. Abbreviating “(1
+ 2) × 3” to “(1 + 2) 3” will result in an
error.
Cursor Basics
The cursor indicates where the next entry will be placed. The cursor may be placed
automatically to different areas by various functions and tools, or can be moved
around by using the ; ' { } keys. Use the cursor keys to select a
menu item, select a cell item in a matrix, and trace along a graph.
Perform an
arithmetic
calculation
Using
parentheses
16
Chapter 2: Operating the Graphing Calculator
Example
Enter “
65536
4
×
8
3
in the Calculation screen. Jump the cursor
to the beginning of the expression (just for this exercise), then
press E to calculate.
1. Press #, then C to clear the display.
2. Enter 4 for the root’s depth, then press @ _.
The root figure is entered, with the cursor automatically placed
below the figure.
For detailed instructions of how to use the @ key, refer to
“Second Function Key” and “ALPHA Key” in this chapter.
3. Enter 65536.
At this moment, the cursor is still placed under the root figure.
4. Press ' to move the cursor out of the area, then enter
| at the cursor.
5. Press @ _ again. Notice that the cursor is automati-
cally placed so that you can specify the depth of this root
figure. Type 3, }, and 8.
6. Press E to obtain the
answer.
Mode Symbol Remarks
Normal mode
The appearance of the cursor pointer
may vary according to the mode or
When A is pressed
position. The major shapes and the
definitions are as follows:
When @ is pressed
: Insert mode
: Overwrite mode
* , and appear at the insertion point within the functions such as a/b and
a
.
The cursor also displays information regarding the calculator’s
input method. See the following diagram.
Cursor appear-
ance and input
method
17
Chapter 2: Operating the Graphing Calculator
Editing Entries
* See page 26 for details.
The calculator has the following two editing modes: equation
mode, and one line mode.
You can select one from the G EDITOR menu of the SETUP
menu.
Equation editor One line editor
Use ; ' { } to move the cursor around, and
use the D B C keys to edit entries.
D key deletes an entry AT THE CURSOR.
B key erases one BEFORE THE CURSOR.
Use C to clear the entire entry line.
When the editing mode is set to one-line, insert mode needs to
be manually specified. Press and release @, then i to
set the insert mode. Press @ i again to return to the
overwrite mode.
The C key clears all screen entries in the Calculation screen,
as well as clearing error messages. It also clears a single line
equation in the Y screen. For more information on the Y
key, refer to Chapters 4 and 6 of the manual.
Example
Type 3096, then change 3 to 4. When done, jump the cursor to
the very end of the numbers.
# C 3 0 9 6 ;
; ; ; D 4
' ' '
Editing modes
Cursor naviga-
tion
About the Insert
mode
18
Chapter 2: Operating the Graphing Calculator
Example
Type 4500000, then remove 500.
# C 4 5 0 0 0 0 0 ;
; ; B B
B
Tips: You can jump the cursor to the beginning or the end of line by
using the @ and ; ' keys. To learn about how to
use the @ key and its functions, refer to the section “Second
Function Key” of this chapter.
Second Function Key
Use @ to call up the calculator’s extended key functions, math functions and
figures.
All functions associated with @ are color coded light yellow, and are printed above
each key.
Note: Available Second function keys differ between the Basic keyboard
and the Advanced keyboard. For example, a second function
e
x
is not accessible within the Basic keyboard.
Example
Enter “2πon the screen.
1. Press # C to clear the screen, then enter “2” by
pressing 2.
2. Press @. When the key
is released, the cursor on
the screen changes,
indicating that a second
function is now ready to be
called up.
3. Press $. The entry
appears on the screen.
19
Chapter 2: Operating the Graphing Calculator
ALPHA Key
Use A to enter an alphabet character. With the Basic keyboard, all 26 alphabet
characters from “A” up to “Z”, and space can be typed; the Advanced keyboard has all
26 characters accessible, as well as
θ
”, “=”, “ : ”, and space.
All functions associated with A are color coded purple, and are printed above
each key.
Note: Do not type out math figures (
sin
,
log
, etc.), graph equation
names (Y1, Y2, etc.), list names (L1, L2, etc.), or matrix names
(mat A, mat B, etc.), etc. with A keys. If “SIN” is entered from
A mode, then each alphabet character — “S”, “I” and “N”
will be entered as a variable. Call up the figure and equation
names from within the second functions and various menus
instead. If a colon (:) is used, data may continue to be entered in
more than one term.
Example
Enter 2
× A on the screen.
1. Press # C to clear
the screen. Enter “2
×” by
pressing 2 |.
2. To enter “A”, press A;
the cursor pattern changes
to “A_” upon releasing the key.
3. Press A to call “A” at the
cursor.
After the entry, the cursor
pattern changes back to
normal.
To type more than one alphabet character, use @ then A
to apply the “ALPHA-LOCK”. When done, press A to escape
from the mode.
Entering one
Alphabet
character
Entering 1 or
More Alphabet
characters
20
Chapter 2: Operating the Graphing Calculator
Math Function Keys
Mathematical functions can be called up quickly with the Math Function keys. The
Math Function key sets for both the Basic and Advanced Keyboards are designed to
suit the needs of calculations at each level.
Basic keyboard
Advanced keyboard
Q Reduces a fraction
/ Converts a number to a mixed fraction, if possible
< Converts a number to an improper fraction
> Converts a number to decimal form
i Gives an answer in quotient and remainder
% Specifies a percentage number
x Enters an variable “
xat the cursor
s Enters a sine function at the cursor
s Enters an arc sine function at the cursor
c Enters a cosine function at the cursor
Math Function keys for the
Basic keyboard:
Math Function keys for the
Advanced keyboard:
21
Chapter 2: Operating the Graphing Calculator
c Enters an arc cosine function at the cursor
t Enters a tangent function at the cursor
t Enters an arctangent function at the cursor
l Enters a logarithm function at the cursor
0 Enters “10 to the
xth power”, then sets the cursor at the x
I Enters a natural logarithm function at the cursor
@ Enters “
e-constant to the power of x”, then sets the cursor at the
x
X Enters a variable
x”, “
θ
”, “T”, or “n”. The variable is automatically
determined according to the calculator’s coordinate setup:
x” for
rectangular, “
θ
for polar, “T” for parametric, nfor sequential.
y Enters “
2
at the cursor, to raise a number to the second power
x Enters “
-
1
at the cursor, to raise a number to the negative first
power
d Enters a mixed number.
b Enters a fraction.
a Enters an exponent.
_ By itself enters a “root” figure; the cursor will be set at “a”, the
depth.
Common Math Function
keys for both keyboards:
22
Chapter 2: Operating the Graphing Calculator
Note: If a number precedes d b a and _, then the
number will be set as the first entry of the figure. Else, the first
entry is blank and the cursor flashes.
Examples
2 d 3 }
4 '
d
; 2 ' 3 } 4 '
+ Enters a “root” figure at the cursor
, Enters “ , ” (a comma) at the cursor
R Stores a number or a formula into a variable
r Recalls an item stored in a variable
z Brings up the VARS menu.
23
Chapter 2: Operating the Graphing Calculator
MATH, STAT, and PRGM Menu Keys
By using the M, S, and P keys, you can access many menu items for
complex calculation tasks. The appendix “List of Menu/Sub-menu Items” shows the
contents of each, with detailed descriptions of each sub-menu item.
Note that the contents of menu items differ drastically between the Basic keyboard
and the Advanced keyboard. For example, the P menu for the Basic mode
contains only one item (A EXEC), while in the Advanced mode there are three menu
items (A EXEC, B EDIT, and C NEW).
Example
Round the following number beyond the decimal point: 34.567
1. Press # C, then
M. The MATH menu
takes over the screen, as
shown to the right. MATH
menu items are displayed on
the left side of the screen.
Note: The example above is simulated on the Basic mode. There are
more menu items available with the Advanced mode.
2. Use the { and } keys to move the cursor up and
down the menu. As you scroll, you will see the corresponding
sub-menu contents (shown on the right side of the screen)
change.
3. Set the cursor at B NUM.
Menu items can also be selected by using shortcut keys (A
through H); in this example, simply press B to select B
NUM. There is no need to use A for this operation.
4. Press a shortcut key 2
to select 2 round(. The
screen now goes back to the
calculation screen, as
follows:
Another way of selecting the sub-menu item is to press '
(or E) on the menu item B NUM. The cursor will be
extended into the sub-menu on the right. Now, move the
cursor on the sub-menu down to 2 round(, then press E.
24
Chapter 2: Operating the Graphing Calculator
5. Type 3 4 . 5 6 7 ,
0 ), and press E.
SETUP Menu
Use this menu to verify basic configurations, such as to define the calculator’s editing
preferences, and scientific and mathematical base units.
To check the current configuration of the calculator, press @,
then ;.
By entering menu items (B
DRG through H SIMPLE),
various setups can be changed.
To exit the SETUP menu, press
C.
Example
Display the calculation result of “1000
2
in scientific notation.
1. Press @, then ;.
Within the SETUP menu,
press C, then 3 to
select 3 Sci under the C
FSE menu.
Tips: Using the arrow keys, move the cursor down to the C FSE
position, press E, and then move the cursor down to the 3
Sci position. Press E to select the sub-menu item.
2. The display goes back to the
SETUP menu’s initial screen.
3. Press C to exit the
SETUP menu.
Checking the
calculator’s
configuration
25
Chapter 2: Operating the Graphing Calculator
4. Press # C to clear
the Calculation screen, type
1 0 0 0 y, then E.
SETUP Menu Items
DRG: For trigonometric calculations and coordinate conversions,
various angle units can be selected:
Deg Angle values to be set in degrees (default for Basic
mode)
Rad Angle values to be set in radians (default for Advanced
mode)
Grad Angle values to be set in gradients (for Advanced mode
only)
FSE: Various decimal formats can be set:
FloatPt Answers are given in decimal form with a floating
decimal point (default).
Fix Answers are given in decimal form. The decimal point
can be set in the TAB menu.
Sci Answers are given in “scientific” notation. For example,
“3500” is displayed as “3.500000000E3”. The decimal
point can be set in the TAB menu.
Eng Answers are given in “engineering” notation with
exponents set to be multiples of 3. “100000” will be
displayed as “100.0000000E3”, and “1000000” will be
shown as “1.000000000E6”. The decimal point can be
set in the TAB menu. (for Advanced mode only)
Note: If the value of the mantissa does not fit within the range
±0.000000001 to ±9999999999, the display changes to
scientific notation. The display mode can be changed
according to the purpose of the calculation.
26
Chapter 2: Operating the Graphing Calculator
TAB: Sets the number of digits beyond the decimal point (0 through 9).
The default is “9”.
COORD: Sets the calculator to various graph coordinate systems.
Rect Rectangular coordinates (default)
Param Parametric equation coordinates (for Advanced mode
only)
Polar Polar coordinates (for Advanced mode only)
Seq Sequential graph coordinates (for Advanced mode
only)
ANSWER: Sets the answer preference to various number formats.
Decimal (Real) Answers will be given in decimal form (default for
Advanced mode)
Mixed (Real) Answers will be given in mixed fractions, whenever
appropriate (default for Basic mode)
Improp (Real) Answers will be given in improper fractions, whenever
appropriate
x±yi (Complex) Answers will be given in complex rectangular form (for
Advanced mode only)
r∠θ (Complex) Answers will be given in complex polar form (for
Advanced mode only)
EDITOR: Sets the editing style to one of two available formats.
Equation Formulas can be
entered in a "type it
as you see it ap-
proach" (default
setting).
One line Formulas will be
displayed on one line.
27
Chapter 2: Operating the Graphing Calculator
Notes: Immediately after changing the EDITOR, the calculator will return
to the calculation screen and the following data will be cleared.
ENTRY memory
Equations stored in the graph equation window (Y)
Equations temporally stored in the SOLVER window (@
')
* Resetting to the default settings (@ p E 1)
will also clear the above data.
Expression of up to 114 bytes can be enetered in the Equation
edit mode. If the expression exceed the screen width, it is
horizontally extended.
Expression of up to 160 bytes can be entered in One-line edit
mode. if the expression exceed the screen width, it goes to the
next line.
SIMPLE: Sets the preference for handling reducible fractions.
Auto Fractions will automatically be reduced down (default)
Manual Fractions will not be reduced unless Q is pressed
Note: All the procedures in this manual are explained using the default
settings unless otherwise specified.
Precedence of Calculations
When solving a mathematical expression, this calculator inter-
nally looks for the following figures and methods (sorted in the
order of evaluation):
1) Fractions (1/4, a/b,
, etc.)
2) Complex angles ()
3) Single calculation functions before a numerical value (X
2
, X
-
1
,
!, “ ° ”, “
r
”, and
g
”)
4) Exponential functions (a
b
,
a
, etc)
5) Multiplications between a value and a stored variable/con-
stant, with “
×abbreviated (2π, 2A, etc.)
6) Single calculation functions after a numerical value (sin, cos,
tan, sin
-
1
, cos
-
1
, tan
-
1
, log, 10
x
, ln, e
x
, , abs, int, ipart, fpart,
(), not, neg, etc.)
28
Chapter 2: Operating the Graphing Calculator
7) Multiplications between a number and a function in #6
(3cos20, etc. “cos20” is evaluated first)
8) Permutations and combinations (nPr, nCr)
9) ×, ÷
10
) +,
11
) and
12
)or, xor xnor
13
) Equalities and nonequalities (<, , >, , , =, deg, dms,
etc.)
Example
The key operation and calculation precedence
5 + 2 | s 30 + 25 | 5 a 3 E
1st
2nd
3rd
6th
5th
4th
If parentheses are used, parenthesized calculations have
precedence over any other calculations.
Error Messages
The calculator will display an error message when a given
command is handled incorrectly, or when instructions cannot be
handled correctly such that the task cannot be processed further.
Various types of error messages are given to inform users the
types of situations to be remedied.
For example, performing the
following key strokes:
5 | E
will result in an error, and the
error message will be displayed.
In such a situation, you can go back to the expression to correct
its syntax by pressing ; or ', or you can erase the
entire line to start over by pressing C.
For a list of various error codes and messages, refer to the
appendix.
29
Chapter 2: Operating the Graphing Calculator
Resetting the Calculator
Use the reset when a malfunction occurs, to delete all data, or to set all mode values
to the default settings. The resetting can be done by either pressing the reset switch
located in the battery compartment, or by selecting the reset in the OPTION menu.
Resetting the calculator’s memory will erase all data stored by the user; proceed with
caution.
1. Using the reset switch
1. Pull down the notch to open the battery cover located on the
back of the calculator.
2. Place the battery cover back until the notch is snapped on.
3. Press O.
The verification window will
appear on the screen.
4. Press C to clear all the
stored data. Press O to
cancel resetting. After C
is pressed, the calculator's
memory will be initialized.
Press any key to display the
calculation screen.
Note: If the above verification window does not appear, remove the
battery cover and gently push the RESET switch with the tip of a
ball-point pen or a similar object.
DO NOT use a tip of a pencil
or mechanical pencil, a
broken lead may cause a
damage to the button mecha-
nism.
30
Chapter 2: Operating the Graphing Calculator
The message on the right may
occasionally appear. In this
case, repeat the procedure
from step 1 to prevent loss of
data.
2. Selecting the RESET within the OPTION menu
1. Press @, then p.
The OPTION menu appears.
2. While in the OPTION menu,
press E to select E
RESET; the RESET sub-
menu items should appear on
the right side of the screen.
3. The first item 1 default set will initialize only the SETUP and
FORMAT settings, while the second item 2 All memory will
erase all memory contents and settings. To reset the memory,
select 2 All memory by pressing 2. The verification
window will appear.
4. Press the C key to clear
all data stored on the
calculator.
Press any key to continue.
31
Chapter 3
Basic Calculations —
Basic Keyboard
In this chapter, we explore more features of this calculator using the Basic Keyboard.
Features such as fraction to decimal conversion and the quotient-remainder key, as
well as basic arithmetic calculations, will be covered in this chapter.
Note: To try the examples in the chapter, it is required that the Basic Keyboard is
already set up by the user. To learn how to set up the Basic Keyboard, read
“Changing the Keyboard” in Chapter 1.
1. Try it!
The speed of light is known to be 186,282
miles (approximately 300,000 kilometers) per
second. That means light can go around the
earth 7 and a half times within a second!
Suppose you are standing at the equator.
While the earth rotates over the period of one
day, you also rotate around the globe at a
certain speed. Knowing the facts above, can
you figure out how fast you are traveling, in
miles per hour?
Since distance traveled = average speed
× time taken, the
following equation can be formed to find out the circumference of
the earth (x miles):
x
× 7.5 = 186282
Then,
x = 186282 ÷ 7.5
Since you know the earth turns around once a day (which means,
in 24 hours), divide the above “x” with 24 to get a value in miles
per hour.
24
× v = x
v =
x
24
32
Chapter 3: Basic Calculations — Basic Keyboard
CONCEPT
1. Enter a math expression, then perform the calculation.
2. Save a number into a variable, then recall the value later.
PROCEDURE
1. First, press #, then C to clear any screen entries.
2. Type 186282 = 7.5,
then press E. The
circumference of the earth is
thus obtained.
3. Store the answer in a variable. A variable is a symbol under
which you can store a numerical value.
We will use variable A to
store the circumference of
the earth. Press R to set
the “store” mode. Press
A A, then E to
store the answer. To call up
the stored answer, press A A E again.
Note: While checking the stored values, you may see “0”; this means
that no value is stored in the variable.
4. Now, since the value you
have stored under “A” is the
distance you will be travel-
ling in 24 hours, divide the
number by 24. Press A
A = 24, then E.
So, you are travelling at 1034.9 miles/hour. That is fast!
33
Chapter 3: Basic Calculations — Basic Keyboard
2. Arithmetic Keys
There are various keys for arithmetic calculations. Use the +
- | =, _, ( and ) keys to perform
basic arithmetic calculations. Press E to solve an equation.
E Executes an expression.
Example
Calculate 1
+ 2.
# C 1 + 2 E
An expression is a mathematical statement that may use num-
bers and/or variables that represent numbers. This works just like
a regular word sentence; one may ask “how are you?”, and you
may answer “okay. But what if an incomplete sentence is thrown,
such as “how are”? You’ll wonder, “how are... what?”; it just
doesn’t make sense. A math expression needs to be complete as
well. 1 + 2, 4x, 2sinx + cosx form valid expressions, while “1
+and
“cos” do not. If an expression is not complete, the calculator will
display an error message upon pressing the E key.
+ Enters a “+sign for addition.
Example
Calculate 12 + 34.
# C 1 2 + 3 4
E
- Enters a sign for subtraction.
Example
Subtract 21 from 43.
4 3 - 2 1 E
Performing
addition,
subtraction,
multiplication
and division
A Note about
expressions
34
Chapter 3: Basic Calculations — Basic Keyboard
| Enters a “×sign for multiplication.
Example
Multiply 12 by 34.
1 2 | 3 4 E
= Enters a “÷sign for division.
Example
Divide 54 by 32.
5 4 = 3 2 E
The multiplication sign can be left out when:
a. It is placed in front of an
open parenthesis.
b. It is followed by a variable or
a mathematical constant (π,
e, etc.):
c. It is followed by a scientific
function, such as sin, log,
etc.:
_ Sets a negative value.
Example
Calculate
-12 × 4.
_ 1 2 | 4 E
Note: Do not use the - key to enter a negative value; use the
_ key instead.
When to leave
out the ×sign
Entering a number
with a negative value
35
Chapter 3: Basic Calculations — Basic Keyboard
( Enters an open parenthesis. Use with “)” as a pair, or the calcula-
tion will result in an error.
) Enters a closing parenthesis; a parenthesis left open will result in
an error.
Example
Calculate (4 + 6) ÷ 5.
( 4 + 6 ) =
5 E
Note: Functions, such as “round(”,
automatically include an open parentheses. Each of these
functions needs to be closed with a closing parenthesis.
3. Calculations Using Various Function Keys
Use the calculator’s function keys to simplify various calculation tasks. The calculator’s
Basic Keyboard is specially designed to help you learn/solve fraction calculations
easier.
Q Simplifies a given fraction stored in the ANSWER memory.
(Set the SIMPLE mode to Manual in the SETUP menu to use this
key.)
Specifying no common factor
Simplify the fraction using the lowest common factor other than 1.
Example
1 b 12 ' + 5
b 12 E
Q E (Simplified by 2,
the lowest common factor of 12
and 6.)
Q E (Simplified by 3,
the lowest common factor of 6
and 3.)
36
Chapter 3: Basic Calculations — Basic Keyboard
Specifying a common factor
Simplify the fraction using the specified common factor.
Example
1 b 12 ' + 5
b 12 E
Q 6 E (Manually
specify 6, the Greatest Com-
mon Factor of 12 and 6, to
simplify the fraction.)
Note: If the wrong number is specified for a common factor, an error will
occur.
Q is effective in a fraction calculation mode only (when the
ANSWER mode is set to Mixed or Improp in the SETUP menu).
/ Converts an improper fraction to a mixed number.
Example
Change
12
5
to a mixed
number.
12 b 5 ' /
E
< Converts a mixed number to an
improper fraction.
Example
Change
2
5
2
to an improper fraction.
< E
> Converts a fraction to a decimal
number.
Example
Change
12
5
to a decimal
number.
> E
Note: Above three conversions will not affect the ANSWER settings in
the SET UP menu.
If a decimal number is not rational, fraction conversion will not
function and display the answer in decimal format.
37
Chapter 3: Basic Calculations — Basic Keyboard
i Performs an integer division, and returns a quotient and a
remainder.
Example
Get a quotient and a remain-
der of 50
÷ 3.
50 i 3 E
* Quotient value is set to Ans
memory and remainder is not
stored.
y Squares the preceding number.
Example
Obtain the answer to 12
2
. (= 144)
12 y E
Note: When no base number is entered, the base number area will be
left blank and just the exponent appear.
C y ;1 2 ' E
d Enters a mixed number.
Example
Enter
5
6
4
4 d 5 ' 6 E
Note: When no value is entered prior to this key, the number areas will
be left blank.
* If the calculator is set to one-line mode, d enters
(integer-fraction separator) only. Use d in combination with
b as follows.
Enter
5
6
4
in one-line mode
4 d 5 b 6 E
* Integer part of the mixed
number must be a natural
number. A variable can not be
used. Equation or use of parenthesis, such as (1
+2) 2
¬
3 or
(5) 2
¬
3, causes syntax error.
* When a numerator or a denominator is negative, the calculator
will cause error.
38
Chapter 3: Basic Calculations — Basic Keyboard
b Enters a fraction, setting the preceding number as its numerator.
* If the calculator is set to one-line mode, then
¬
will be entered
instead. For example, “2
¬
5” indicates “
2
5
”.
Example
Calculate
2
5
+
3
4
.
2 b 5 ' + b
3 ' 4 ' E
a Enters an exponent, setting the preceding number as its base.
Example
Raise 4 to the 5th power. (= 1024)
4 a 5 E
Note: When no base value is entered, “a
b
will be entered with both
number areas left blank.
C a ; 4 ' 5 E
When calculating x to the power of m-th power of n, enter as
follows;
Calculate 2
3
2
(= 512)
2 a 3 a 2 E
The above calculation is interpreted as 2
3
2
= 2
9
.
If you wish to calculate (2
3
)
2
= 8
2
, press ( 2 a 3 '
) a 2 E.
, Enters a comma “ , ” at the cursor. A comma is required in some
of the MATH functions. For more information, refer to the next
section “Calculations Using MATH Menu Items” in this chapter.
R Stores a number in a variable.
Example
Let A = 4, and B = 6.
Calculate A + B.
4 R A A E
6 R A B E
A A + A B E
39
Chapter 3: Basic Calculations — Basic Keyboard
x Enters an “x”, an unknown variable. Use this key when working
with graph equations. Refer to Chapter 4 “Basic Graphing
Features” to learn how to use this feature.
To access the second function of a key (printed above the keys in
yellow), press and release @, then press the key you want to
use.
% Set the preceding value as a percentage.
Example
Get 25% of 1234.
1 2 3 4 | 2 5 @
% E
*Percentage must be a positive
value equal to or less than
100.
x Enters “x
-
1
”, and returns an inverse by raising a value to the -1
power. The inverse of “5”, for example, is “
1
5
”.
Example
Raise 12 to the
-1 power. (= 0.083333333)
1 2 @ x E
Note: When no base number is entered, “x
-
1
will be entered, with “x” left
blank.
C @ x ;1 2 E
_ Enters “
a
”.
Example
•Bring 4 to the 5
th
root. (= 1.319507911)
5 @ _ 4 E
Note: When no depth of power is entered,
a
is entered, with both
number areas left blank.
C @ _ 5 ' 4 E
+ Enters a square root symbol.
Example
Obtain the square root of 64. (= 8)
@ + 6 4 E
Second
functions
40
Chapter 3: Basic Calculations — Basic Keyboard
r Recalls a variable.
Example
Set C = 8.
8 R A C E
Recall the value of C.
@ r A C E
z Accesses the VARS menu. Refer to chapters 4 and 6 to learn how
to use each item in this menu.
{ } Enter braces to group numbers as a list.
b Recalls the previous answer. Use this key to incorporate the
answer to the previous calculation into an expression.
Example
•Perform 3
× 3.
3 | 3 E
Subtract the value of the
previous answer from “10”.
1 0 - @ b E
Note: b can be considered as a variable; its value is automatically
set when E is pressed. If b is not empty, then pressing
+, -, |, or = will recall “Ans” and places it at
the beginning of an expression. If “1” was the previous answer,
then pressing + 4 E will result in “5”.
41
Chapter 3: Basic Calculations — Basic Keyboard
e Recalls the previous entry. This is useful when you want to modify
the previous entry, rather than reenter the whole expression over.
Example
Calculate 4
× 6.
4 | 6 E
Next, calculate 4 × 8.
@ e B 8 E
Note: Executed expressions are stored in a temporary memory in the
executed order. If the temporary memory is full, the oldest data is
automatically deleted. Be aware that e may not function on
these occasions.
A maximum of 160 bytes can be stored in the temporary memory.
The capacity may vary when there are division codes between
expressions.
When switching from equation edit mode to one-line edit mode in
the SETUP menu, all the numerical and graph equations stored in
the temporary memory are cleared and cannot be recalled.
$ Enters “pi”. Pi is a mathematical constant, representing the ratio
of the circumference of a circle to its diameter.
Example
Enter “2π”. (= 6.283185307)
2 @ $ E
j Calls up the CATALOG menu. From the CATALOG menu, you can
directly access various functions in the menus.
Functions are listed in alphabetic order.
•Move the cursor using the {/} keys and press E
to access or enter the function.
Press A and an appropriate alphabetic key (A to Z) to
navigate the catalog.
Press A
+ { /} to scroll the catalog page by page
and press @ + {/} to jump to the beginning or the
end of the catalog.
See page 246 for details.
42
Chapter 3: Basic Calculations — Basic Keyboard
4. Calculations Using MATH Menu Items
The MATH menu contains functions used for more elaborate math concepts, such as
trigonometry, logarithms, probability, and math unit/format conversions. The MATH
menu items may be incorporated into your expressions.
Note: The default angle measurement unit while using the calculator’s
Basic Keyboard is degrees. If you wish to work in radians, then
the configuration must be changed in the SET UP menu. For
more information, see page 25.
The degree and radian systems are two of the basic methods of
measuring angles. There are 360 degrees in a circle, and “2-pi”
radians. 1 degree is equal to pi/180 radians. “Then, what’s this
pi?”, you may ask. Pi, or to use its symbol π”, is the ratio of the
circumference of a circle to its diameter. The value of π is the
same for any circle “3.14...”, and it is believed to have an infinite
number of digits beyond the decimal point.
A CALC
The CALC sub-menu contains items to be used in calculations
containing trigonometric and logarithmic functions.
Note: The following examples show keystrokes with keyboard shortcuts.
It is also possible to select a sub-menu item using the cursor
keys.
1 sin Enters a sine function to be used in a trigonometric calculation.
Example
Calculate sine 90°.
M A 1 9 0 E
2 cos Enters a cosine function to be
used in a trigonometric calcula-
tion.
Example
Calculate cosine 60°.
M A 2 6 0 E
A Note about
Degrees and
Radians
43
Chapter 3: Basic Calculations — Basic Keyboard
3 tan Enters a tangent function to be used in a trigonometric calcula-
tion.
Example
Calculate tangent 45°.
M A 3 4 5 E
4 log Enters a “log” function for a logarithmic calculation
Example
Calculate log 100.
M A 4 1 0 0
E
5 10
x
Enters a base of 10, setting the
cursor at the exponent.
Example
Calculate 5
× 10
5
.
5 | M A 5 5 E
B NUM
Use the NUM sub-menu items when converting between various
number systems.
1 abs( abs(
value
)
Returns an absolute value.
*A real number, a list, matrix, variable, or equation can be used
as values.
Example
Find an absolute value of
-40.5”.
M B 1 _ 4 0
. 5 E
44
Chapter 3: Basic Calculations — Basic Keyboard
2 round( round(
value [
,
digit number of decimals]
)
Returns the rounded value of the term in parentheses. A rounding
point can be specified.
*A real number, a list, matrix, variable, or equation can be used
as values.
Example
Round off 1.2459 to the nearest hundredth. (= 1.25)
M B 2 1 . 2 4 5 9 , 2 ) E
3 ipart ipart
value
Returns only the integer part of a decimal number.
*A real number, a list, matrix, variable, or equation can be used
as values.
Example
Discard the integer part of 42.195. (= 42)
M B 3 4 2 . 1 9 5 E
4 fpart fpart
value
Returns only the fraction part of a decimal number.
*A real number, a list, matrix, variable, or equation can be used
as values.
Example
Discard the fraction part of 32.01. (= 0.01)
M B 4 3 2 . 0 1 E
5 int int
value
Rounds down a decimal number to the closest integer.
Example
Round down 34.56 to the nearest whole number. (= 34)
M B 5 3 4 . 5 6 E
45
Chapter 3: Basic Calculations — Basic Keyboard
6 min( min(
list
)
Finds and returns the minimum value within a list of numbers. To
define a list of more than two numbers, group the numbers with
brackets (@ { and @ }), with each element
separated by a comma.
Example
Find the smallest value among 4, 5, and
-9.
M B 6 @ { 4 , 5 , _ 9
@ } ) E
7 max( max(
list
)
Finds and returns the maximum
value within a list of numbers.
Example
Find the largest value among 4, 5, and
-9.
M B 7 @ { 4 , 5 , _ 9
@ } ) E
8 lcm( lcm(
natural number
,
natural number
)
Returns the least common multiple of two integers.
Example
Find the least common multiple of 12 and 18.
M B 8 1 2 , 1 8 ) E
9 gcd( gcd(
natural number
,
natural
number
)
Returns the greatest common
divisor of two integers.
Example
Find the greatest common divisor of 16 and 36.
M B 9 1 6 , 3 6 ) E
46
Chapter 3: Basic Calculations — Basic Keyboard
0 remain
natural number
remain
natural number
Returns the remainder of a division.
Example
• Obtain the remainder when
123 is divided by 5.
1 2 3 M B 0 5
E
CPROB
Use the PROB sub-menu items for probability calculations.
1 random random
[(number of trial)]
Returns a random decimal number between 0 and 1.
Example
Make a list with three random
numbers.
Note: Set the “FSE” to “Fix” and “TAB”
to “0”.
@ { M C
1 | 100 , M C 1 | 100 ,
M C 1 | 100 @ } E
Note: The random functions (random, rndInt(, rndCoin, and rndDice)
will generate different numbers every time when the display is
redrawn. Therefore, the table values of the random functions will
be different every time. When in case of random-based graphing
calculations, the tracing values and other parameters of the graph
will not match the graph's visual representation.
2 rndInt( rndInt(
minimum value, maximum value [, number of trial]
)
Returns a specified number of random integers, between a
minimum and a maximum value.
Example
Produce eight random integers, ranging between values of 1
and 6.
M C 2 1 , 6 , 3 ) E
* Minimum value: 0
x
min
10
10
Maximum value: 0 x
max
10
10
Number of trial: 1 n 999
47
Chapter 3: Basic Calculations — Basic Keyboard
3 rndCoin rndCoin
[(number of trial)]
Returns a specified number of random integers to simulate a coin
flip: 0 (head) or 1 (tail). The size of the list (i.e., how many times
the virtual coin is thrown) can be specified. (The same as rndInt
(0, 1, number of times))
Example
Make the calculator flip a
virtual coin 4 times.
M C 3 ( 4
) E
4 rndDice rndDice
[(number of trial)]
Returns specified number of random integers (1 to 6) to simulate
rolling dice. The size of the list (i.e., how many times the die is
thrown) can be specified. (The same as rndInt (1, 6, number of
times))
Example
Make the calculator roll a virtual die 11 times.
M C 4 ( 11 ) E
5 nPr Returns the total number of different arrangements (permuta-
tions) for selecting “r” items out of “n” items.
n
P
r
=
n!
(n r)!
Example
•How many ways can 6
persons be seated in a car
with 4 seats?
6 M C 5 4 E
48
Chapter 3: Basic Calculations — Basic Keyboard
6 nCr Returns the total number of combinations for selecting “r” item out
of “n” items.
n
C
r
=
n!
r!(n
r)!
Example
•How many different groups of
7 students can be formed with
15 students?
1 5 M C 6 7
E
7 ! Returns a factorial.
Example
Calculate 6
× 5 × 4 × 3 × 2 × 1.
6 M C 7 E
D CONV
CONV sub-menu items are to be used when converting a number
in decimal form (degrees) to a number in sexagesimal form
(degrees, minutes, seconds), or vice versa.
The “base 60” sexagesimal system, as well as the minutes-
second measurement system, was invented by the Sumerians,
who lived in the Mesopotamia area around the fourth millennium
B.C.(!) The notion of a 360 degrees system to measure angles
was introduced to the world by Hipparchus (555-514 B.C.) and
Ptolemy (2nd cent. A.D.), about 5000 years later. We still use
these ancient systems today, and this calculator supports both
formats.
1 deg Ta kes a number in sexagesimal form, and converts it into a
decimal number.
Example
Convert 34° 56’ 78” to
degrees.
3 4 M E 1 5 6
M 2 7 8 M
3 M D 1
E
Sexagesimal
and Degree
System
49
Chapter 3: Basic Calculations — Basic Keyboard
2 dms Takes a number in decimal form (in degrees), and converts it into
a sexagesimal number. To enter a number in sexagesimal form,
use items in the “ANGLE” sub-menu, described in the next
subsection of this Chapter.
Example
Show 40.0268 degrees in
degrees, minutes, and
seconds.
4 0 . 0268 M D
2 E
E ANGLE
The Basic mode has two angle modes: Deg (degree) and Rad
(radian). Use the E ANGLE menu to enter a degree value in Rad
mode or a radian value in Deg mode. (The gradient mode is not
included in the Basic mode. Refer to Chapter 5 for details.)
1 ° Inserts a degree, and sets the preceding value in degrees.
2 ’ Inserts a minute, and sets the preceding value in minutes.
3 ” Inserts a second, and sets the preceding value in seconds.
Example
Enter 34° 56’ 78”.
3 4 M E 1
5 6 M 2 “E ANGLE” remains selected;
7 8 M 3 type the number to enter the symbols.
E
4 r Enters an “r”, to enter a number in radians.
Example
•Type 2 radian.
2 M E 4 E
50
Chapter 4
Basic Graphing Features
— Basic Keyboard
This chapter takes the knowledge you have gained in Chapter 3 several steps further.
Note: To try the examples in this chapter, it is required that the Basic Keyboard is
already set up by the user. To learn how to set up the Basic Keyboard, read
“Changing the Keyboard” in Chapter 1.
1. Try it!
Two math expressions can be derived from the above fare
systems. If yrepresents the cost, while “xrepresents the
mileage, then:
y = 2 + 1.8x.................... Tomato Cab’s fare system
y = 3.5 + 1.2x ................ Orange Cab’s fare system
Use the calculator’s graphing capabilities to figure out the
approximate point where the Orange Cab gets ahead of the
Tomato Cab, in terms of cost performance.
There are two taxi cab companies in your city, Tomato Cab and Orange Cab,
with different fare systems. The Tomato Cab charges $2.00 upon entering the
taxi cab, and $1.80 for each mile the taxi travels. The Orange Cab, on the other
hand, charges $3.50 plus $1.20 per mile. This means that taking the Tomato
Cab will initially cost less than
going with the Orange Cab, but
will be more expensive as you
travel longer distances.
Suppose you need to go to a place
3 miles away from where you are
now. Which cab company should
you take to save money?
51
Chapter 4: Basic Graphing Features — Basic Keyboard
CONCEPT
1. By using two linear graphs, the approximate crossing point
can be found.
2. The exact crossing point can be found with the TABLE
function.
PROCEDURE
1. Press Y to enter the Graph Equation window. Six equa-
tion entry areas appear, from “Y1=” to “Y6=”. Since we need
only two equations in this exercise, let’s use “Y1=” and “Y2=”.
2. By default, the cursor should be placed on the right side of the
“Y1=” equation, next to the equal sign. If this is not so, use the
cursor keys to bring the cursor to the “Y1=” line, then press the
C key to clear any entries. The cursor will automatically be
placed to the right of the equal sign.
3. Enter the first equation, “2
+ 1.8X”, to represent the Tomato
Cab’s fare system.
2 + 1 . 8 x
Use the x key to enter the “x”, representing the distance
in miles.
4. When the equation line is complete, press E. The first
equation is now stored, and the cursor automatically jumps to
the second line, where the second equation can be entered.
5. At the second line, press
C to clear any entries,
then enter “3.5
+ 1.2X” to
represent the Orange Cab’s
fare system. When done
entering the equation, press
E. The two equations are now ready to graph.
6. Press G to draw the graphs.
To draw a graph, “=” must be highlighted. If not, move the
cursor to “=” of the targeted equation and press E to draw
a graph, and press E again not to draw a graph.
52
Chapter 4: Basic Graphing Features — Basic Keyboard
Graph Basics
The graph examples in this exercise are called X-Y graphs. An
X-Y graph is quite useful for clearly displaying the relationship
between two variables.
7. Let’s take a look at the
graph. The vertical axis
represents the Y value, while
X is represented by the
horizontal axis. It appears
that the two diagonal lines
cross at the point where the X value is somewhere between 2
and 3, indicating that Orange Cab costs less than the other,
after 3 miles of traveling.
8. Next, press T to find the
values per graph increment.
When the traveling distance
is 2 miles, the Tomato Cab
charges 30 cents less overall
than the Orange Cab, but it
costs 30 cents more at 3 miles. To make the X increment
smaller, press @ y.
9. When the Table setting window appears, move the cursor
down to “TBLStep”, type . 5, and press E. Now
the Y values will be sampled at every 0.5 mile.
10
. Press T to show the
table again. It indicates that
when the X value is 2.5, both
Y1 and Y2 values are 6.5. It
is now clear that if you are
traveling 2.5 miles or more,
the Orange Cab costs less.
2. Explanations of Various Graphing Keys
Y: Displays the Graph Equation window. Up to 10 different equations
can be entered.
After the graph expression is entered, press E to store the
equation.
53
Chapter 4: Basic Graphing Features — Basic Keyboard
= : The expression can be represented as a graph.
= : The expression cannot be drawn as a graph.
•Move the cursor pointer to the “=” sign and press E to
change between to-draw and not-to-draw.
Note: To switch the window back to the calculation screen, simply press
the # key.
G: Draws a full-screen graph based on the equation(s) entered in the
Graph Equation window. To cancel the graph drawing, press
O.
Note: If no equations are entered in the Graph equation window, only
the vertical (Y) and horizontal (X) axis will be displayed upon
pressing the G key.
T: Displays the graph values in a table. The default sample incre-
ment value of the graph’s X axis is “1”.
Z: Displays the ZOOM menu. Within the ZOOM menu, various
preferences can be set for the graph appearance on zooming in/
out .
The menu items with each function and the sub-menu items are
described below:
A ZOOM
There are a myriad of tools under this menu item, by which the
graph can be zoomed in/out in various styles. Press “A” within the
ZOOM menu to select this menu item.
1 Auto According to the WINDOW setup, the graph will be
zoomed in by adjusting the “Ymin” (the minimum Y
value) and “Ymax” (the maximum Y value) according to
the “Xmin” (the minimum X value) and “Xmax” (the
maximum X value). When this item is selected, the
graph will automatically be redrawn.
Note: The “Auto” sub-menu item is directly affected by how the WIN-
DOW items are set up. Refer to the W key section in this
chapter to learn how to set up the Xmin and Xmax items.
54
Chapter 4: Basic Graphing Features — Basic Keyboard
2 Box A box area can be specified with this sub-menu tool so
that the area within the box will be displayed full
screen.
To select a box area to zoom:
1. While the ZOOM menu item is selected within the
ZOOM window, press 2 to select 2 Box.
2. The graph appears on the screen. Use the cursor
keys to position the cursor at a corner of the
required box area. Press E to mark the point as
an anchor.
3. Once the initial anchor is set, move the cursor to a
diagonal corner to define the box area. When the
required area is squared off, press E .
If a mistake is made, the anchor can be removed by
pressing the C key.
4. The graph will automatically be redrawn.
3 In A zoomed-in view of the graph will be displayed, sized
according to the B FACTOR set up under the ZOOM
menu. For example, if the vertical and horizontal zoom
factors are set to “2”, then the graph will be magnified
two times. Refer to the B FACTOR segment of this
section for more information.
4 Out The graph image will be zoomed out according to the B
FACTOR setup under the ZOOM menu.
5 Default The graph will be displayed with default graph setting
(Xmin =
-10, Xmax = 10, Xscl = 1, Ymin = -10, Ymax =
10, Yscl = 1)
6 Square Set the same scale for X and Y axes. The Y-axis scale
is adjusted to the current X-axis scale. The graph will
be redrawn automatically.
7 Dec Sets the screen dot as 0.1 for both axes. The graph will
then be redrawn automatically.
8 Int Sets the screen dot as 1.0 for both axes. The graph will
then be redrawn automatically.
9 Stat Displays all points of statistical data set.
55
Chapter 4: Basic Graphing Features — Basic Keyboard
B FACTOR
Use this menu to set the vertical and horizontal zooming factor.
The factor set under this menu directly affects the zoom rate of
the 3 In and 4 Out sub-menu tools under the ZOOM menu, as
described above.
To set the zooming factor, do the following:
1. Within the
B FACTOR menu,
press E to
activate the setup
tool.
2. When the “Zoom factor” window appears, the cursor
is automatically placed at “X_Fact=”. The default
zoom factor is 4; enter the required value here.
3. Pressing E after entering a value will switch the
cursor position to “Y_Fact=”. Enter the required
zooming factor, and press E.
4. To go back to the ZOOM menu, press the Z
key.
C POWER
1
x
2
Use this zooming tool when the equation contains a
form of “x
2
”.
2
x
–1
Use this zooming tool when the equation contains a
form of “
x
-
1
”.
3
x
Use this tool to zoom correctly when the equation
contains a form of
x
”.
D EXP
1 10
X
Use this tool when the equation contains a form of
10
x
”.
2 log X Use this tool when the equation contains a form of log
x”.
56
Chapter 4: Basic Graphing Features — Basic Keyboard
E TRIG
1 sin X Use this when the equation contains a sine function.
2 cos X Use this when the equation contains a cosine function.
3 tan X Use this when the equation contains a tangent func-
tion.
F STO
Under this menu item there is one tool that enables the storing of
graph window settings.
1 StoWin By selecting this sub-menu item, the current graph
window setup will be stored.
Note: The actual graph image will not be stored with this tool.
G RCL
Under this menu item there are two tools that enable the recalling
of the previous graph window setup:
1 RclWin On selecting this sub-menu item, the previously stored
window setup will be recalled, and the graph will be
redrawn accordingly. If no window setup has been
stored previously, the default graph window setup will
be used.
2 PreWin On selecting this sub-menu item, the window setup
prior to the current zoom setup will be recalled, and the
graph will be redrawn accordingly.
57
Chapter 4: Basic Graphing Features — Basic Keyboard
U: Press this button to trace the graph drawn on the screen, to
obtain the X-Y coordinates:
1. While the graph is displayed,
press the U key. The
cursor appears, flashing on
the graph line, with the
present X-Y coordinates.
2. Trace the graph using the ; or ' keys. The ; key
decreases the value of x, while the ' key increases it.
3. Pressing the U key again will redraw the graph, with the
cursor at the center of the screen. If the cursor is moved
beyond the range of the screen, pressing the U key will
redraw the screen centered around the cursor.
4. When done, press the C key to escape the tracing
function.
If more than one graph is displayed on the screen, use the {
or } keys to switch the cursor from one graph to the other.
Note: If the U key is not activated, the cursor will not be bound to
the graph. Pressing the ;, ', {, or } keys will
position the free-moving flashing cursor on the graph display.
W: Displays the graph window setup. The setup values — the
minimum/maximum X/Y values, and X/Y-axis scale — can be
changed manually:
1. While the graph is displayed
on the screen, press the
W key. The following
window appears, with the
cursor set at “Xmin=”.
2. The required X-minimum value can be entered here. This
limits the left boundary of the graph window. For example, if
“Xmin=” is set to “0”, then the portion of the graph’s Y-axis to
the left will not be displayed.
3. Once the “Xmin=” value is entered (“0”, for example), press
E. The left limit of the graph is now set, and the cursor
moves to “Xmax=”.
58
Chapter 4: Basic Graphing Features — Basic Keyboard
When @ " are pressed on the graph screen, the graph
and table are displayed on the same screen.
When @ " are pressed on the equation input screen,
the graph and equation are displayed on the same screen.
4. Now the right boundary of the graph can be set. Enter the
required value here (“3”, for example), and press E.
Note: The “Xmax=” value cannot be set equal to or smaller than the
value of “Xmin”. If so done, the calculator will display an error
message upon attempting to redraw the graph, and the graph will
not be displayed.
5. The next item “Xscl=” sets the frequency of the X-axis indices.
The default value is “1”. If, for example, the value is set to
“0.5”, then indices will be displayed on the X-axis at incre-
ments of 0.5. Enter the required “Xscl=” value (“0.5”, for
example), and press E.
6. The “Ymin=”, “Ymax=”, and “Yscl=” can be set, as was
described for “Xmin=”, “Xmax=”, and “Xscl=” above.
7. When done, press the G key to draw the graph with the
newly configured window setup.
3. Other Useful Graphing Features
": Splits the display vertically, to show the graph on the left side of
the screen while showing the X-Y values in a table on the right.
The cursor is positioned on the table, and can be scrolled up/
down using the { or } keys.
Graph and table Graph and equation
59
Chapter 4: Basic Graphing Features — Basic Keyboard
Y
G
GY
G@ " Y@ "
@ "
The following illustration shows these relationships.
The split screen is always in the trace mode. Therefore, the
cursor pointer appears on the graph. Accordingly, the coordi-
nate values are displayed reverse in the table and in the
equation at which the cursor pointer is located is also displayed
reversely.
Using ; or ', move the cursor along the graph.
(Values displayed reverse in the table are also changed
accordingly.)
When two or more graphs are displayed on the screen, the
desired graph is selected using { or }. (The table or
equation on the right of the screen is also changed accordingly.)
The table on the split screen does not relate to the table
settings on the full-screen table.
The table on the split screen is displayed in units of trace
movement amount based on the cursor pointer position on the
graph screen. When the full-screen table is displayed by
pressing T, a different table may appear on the screen.
When the EXPRES or Y’ is set to ON on the FORMAT menu,
the equation or coordinates are displayed on the graph screen.
Only equations to be graphed are displayed on the split screen.
Press G or T on the split screen to display the full-
screen of the graph or table. To exit the split screen, press any
of other function keys.
60
Chapter 4: Basic Graphing Features — Basic Keyboard
k: Calculations can be performed on the entered graph equation(s).
Press @ k to access. The following 6 sub-menu tools are
available:
1 Value With this sub-menu tool, the Y value can be obtained
by entering an X value. The flashing graph cursor will
then be placed in that position on the graph. If more
than one graph equation is set, use the { or
} keys to switch to the equation you wish to work
with.
Note: If the entered X value
is incalculable, an
error message will be
displayed. Also, if the
Y value exceeds the
calculation range, then “----” will be displayed instead.
2 Intsct With this tool, the intersection(s) of two or more graphs
can be found, where the flashing cursor will be placed.
When the intersection is found, then the X-Y coordi-
nates of the intersection will be displayed at the bottom
of the screen. If there is more than one intersection,
the next intersection(s) can be found by selecting the
tool again.
Note: If there is only one
graph equation
entered there will be
no other graph(s) to
form an intersection,
so selecting this tool
will result in an error.
3 Minimum Finds the minimum of the given graph, and places the
flashing cursor at that position.
Note: If the given graph has
no minimum value,
an error message will
be displayed.
61
Chapter 4: Basic Graphing Features — Basic Keyboard
4 Maximum Finds the maximum of the given graph, and places the
flashing cursor at that position.
Note: If the given graph has
no maximum value,
an error message will
be displayed.
5 X_Incpt Finds an X-intercept (a crossing point of the graph on
the X-axis) of the given graph, and places the flashing
cursor at that position. If there is more than one X-
intercept, the next X-intercept can be found by select-
ing the tool again.
Note: If the graph has no X-
intercept, an error
message will be
displayed.
6 Y_Incpt Finds an Y-intercept of the given graph, and places the
flashing cursor at that position.
Note: If the graph has no Y-
intercept, an error
message will be
displayed.
d: There is an extensive set of features under this menu item that
enhance the graphing capabilities of the calculator. Only the
shading function will be covered here; refer to Chapter 6 “Ad-
vanced Graphing Features — Advanced Keyboard” in this manual
for more information.
To access the DRAW menu, press @ d.
An inequation can be expressed with the calculator’s graphing
capability. Here’s how:
1. Set up a simple graph within the Graph Equation window.
Enter “X
2
for Y1, for example.
62
Chapter 4: Basic Graphing Features — Basic Keyboard
2. Press @, and d to enter the DRAW menu, then press
G to select G SHADE. The SHADE sub-menu appears.
3. Press 1 to select 1 SET.
The “Set shade” window
appears.
4. Using the cursor keys, move
the cursor pointer to the
appropriate position.
5. Press @ z A.
6. Press 1 to select Y1.
7. When the value is set, press
the G key. The graph will
be redrawn.
8. Let’s add another inequation,
so that the area where the
two inequality overlap can be shaded. Press the Y key,
and enter another simple graph equation such as “X
+ 4” for
“Y2”.
9. Now, return to the SHADE menu by pressing @ d,
and G. Press 1 to select “1 SET”.
10
. Within the “Set shade” window, add the second equation at the
right of the topmost inequation. Use the ' or ; key to
position the underscore cursor, then select “Y2” using the
VARS menu.
11
. Press the G to redraw the graph with the new shading
appearance.
63
Chapter 4: Basic Graphing Features — Basic Keyboard
f: The graph appearance can be set and verified under this menu.
Press @ f to access.
A –––––– Displays the current FORMAT settings. The default
setting is:
OFF (for the graph equation to be displayed
on the graph)
OFF (for displaying numeric derivatives on
the graph)
ON (for displaying the X/Y axis on the
graph)
OFF (for displaying a grid on the graph)
B EXPRES This sets whether or not graph equations are displayed
on the graph screen. To display the equations on the
graph, select 1 ON by pressing 1 at this menu
item.
C Y’ The numeric derivative (dx/dy) can be displayed on the
graph screen. To activate this function, select 1 ON by
pressing 1 at this menu item.
D AXIS The graph axis can be set invisible with this menu item.
To hide the X/Y axis of the graph, select 2 OFF by
pressing 2 at this menu item.
E GRID The graph display can be backed with an X-Y grid. To
show the grid on the graph, select 1 ON by pressing
1 at this menu item.
Substitution feature
The substitution feature allows you to input an equation using characters and
variables, and then substitute numeric values for the characters to draw the graph.
The substitution feature is valid only in the rectangular coordinate system.
Using this feature, any number of numeric value sets can be substituted while
referring to the graph drawing screen. This clearly shows the changes in the graph
depending on numeric values.
For example, the graph for “Y1 = AX
3
+ BX
2
+ CX
2
D” is drawn by substituting
numeric values for variables A, B, C, and D of the equation.
64
Chapter 4: Basic Graphing Features — Basic Keyboard
1. Press @ ,.
The substitution feature
screen will appear. The
equation on which the cursor
pointer is located and its
variables are displayed on
the right of the screen.
If variables (characters) contain no values, the graph is not
drawn.
If independent memories A to C contain any numeric values,
the graph is drawn based on these values.
* If the equation (in this example, Y1) on which the cursor is
located contains no variables, the substitution feature screen
will not appear.
22 kinds of variables (characters), A to Z except for R, T, X, and Y can be used for
the substitution feature.
Up to seven variables (characters) can be used for one equation. (If the equation
contains more than seven variables (characters), up to seven characters from the
top of the equation are determined as variables and subsequent characters are
ignored.)
If you attempt to execute an equation containing no variables, the substitution
feature becomes invalid and the error message, “NO VARIABLE”, appears on the
screen.
•To input the equation, there are the following two methods after Y has been
pressed. After the equation has been input, the same operations apply to subse-
quent steps.
Example
Substitute numeric values under the conditions that “Y1 = AX
2
+
BX + C” and “Y2 = AX” have been input.
Equation Entry screen
The cursor pointer is located at
Y1. Drawing of both graphs Y1
and Y2 is valid.
65
Chapter 4: Basic Graphing Features — Basic Keyboard
2. Press 2 E.
(2 is input to A.)
The graph for “Y1 = 2X
2
” is
drawn. (Since B and C have
no values, they are ignored.)
At this time, the graph for Y2
is also drawn. Y2 also uses variable A which is used in Y1.
Therefore, the drawing of the graph for Y2 is also valid.
* If you need to draw only the graph for Y2, it is necessary to
change variables (characters) or make the graph drawing for
Y1 invalid.
3. Press 1 E.
(1 is input to B.)
The graph is changed from
“Y1 = 2X
2
to “Y1 = 2X
2
+
1X”.
4. Press _ 3 E.
(
-3 is input to C.)
Now, the graph for “Y1 = 2X
2
+ 1X 3” is drawn on the
screen.
Next, change variable A from 2 to 5 and see how the graph
changes.
1. Press { { 5 E.
(The cursor is moved from C
to A and 5 is input.)
The slope of the graph
becomes sharp.
*Move the cursor accordingly and substitute other numeric
values for variables to view how the graph changes.
* The trace function cannot be used in the substitution feature.
(When U is pressed, the full-screen graph will appear.)
66
Chapter 5
Advanced Calculations —
Advanced Keyboard
Note: To try the examples in the chapter, it is required that the Advanced Keyboard is
already set up by the user. To learn how to set up the Advanced Keyboard, read
“Changing the Keyboard” in Chapter 1.
1. Try it!
The Mendocino Tree, a coast redwood growing in Montgomery Woods State
Reserve in California, is known to be the tallest living tree in the world. You are
to find out how tall the tree is by using the following factors:
The distance from you to the bottom of the
tree is exactly 505.8 feet, and the tree
stands vertically.
The angle of elevation between the top
and the bottom of the tree is 36 degrees
If the base length of the right triangle is 505.8 feet, and the angle
of elevation is 36 degrees, then the following expression can be
derived:
the height of the Mendocino tree (ft.) = 505.8 ft.
× tan(36°)
CONCEPT
1. Verify/change the calculator’s angle unit.
2. Use the calculator’s trigonometric function key on the
Advanced keyboard to enter/perform the calculation.
67
Chapter 5: Advanced Calculations — Advanced Keyboard
PROCEDURE
1. Since the angle of elevation is measured in degrees, the
calculator’s angle setting will
need to be matched with
that. Press @ ; to
bring up the SETUP menu.
2. On the right side of the
SETUP menu, the current
setup will be displayed.
Make sure that the top line is
indicated as Deg (i.e.,
degrees). If not, then the
angle system will need to be
changed. Press B to
select B DRG, then press
1 to select 1 Deg.
3. Now, let’s work on the actual calculation part. Press the #
key to enter the Calculation screen, and press C to clear
any screen entries.
4. Press 505.8 | t
36. Press E to execute
the calculation.
2. Various Calculation Keys
The calculator’s Advanced Keyboard is designed so that various advanced-level
expressions can be written quickly with few strokes of the keys.
Note: The default angle unit for the Advanced mode is radians. The
examples hereafter will therefore feature the radian angle system,
unless otherwise specified.
The keys with each associated math function are described
below. Refer to the usage diagram in the Appendix for the
parameters for each sub-menu item.
68
Chapter 5: Advanced Calculations — Advanced Keyboard
s Enters a sine function to be used in a trigonometric expression.
c Enters a cosine function to be used in a trigonometric expression.
t Enters a tangent function to be used in a trigonometric expres-
sion.
l Enters a common logarithm function.
I Enters a natural logarithm function.
Example
Calculate In
e
4
.
I @ @ 4 E.
y Raises the preceding value to the 2nd power.
If no preceding value exists, then the base value will be left blank.
d Enters a mixed number, with all elements left blank. If a preceding
number exists, then the number is assumed as the integer part of
the mixed number. (See page 37.)
b Enters a fraction. Sets the preceding value as its numerator while
the denominator left blank. (See page 38.)
If no preceding value exists, then both the numerator and the
denominator will be left blank.
a Raises the preceding value to a power. The exponent value can
subsequently be entered.
If no preceding value exists, then both the base and the exponent
area will be left blank. (See page 38.)
69
Chapter 5: Advanced Calculations — Advanced Keyboard
The following math functions can be accessed with the use of @ key. To learn the
basic steps of how to access the second function of each key, refer to the section
“Second Function Key” of Chapter 2.
s Enters an arcsine function to be used in a trigonometric expres-
sion.
Example
Calculate arcsine 1.
@ s 1 E.
c Enters an arccosine function to
be used in a trigonometric
expression.
Example
Calculate arccosine 0.5.
@ c 0.5 E.
t Enters an arctangent function to be used in a trigonometric
expression.
Example
Calculate arctangent 1.
@ t 1 E.
Note: Expressions with inverse trigonometric functions evaluate in the
following ranges.
θ
= sin
-1
x,
θ
= tan
-1
x
θ
= cos
-1
x
Deg: 0 |
θ
| 90 Deg: 0 |
θ
| 180
Rad: 0 |
θ
|
π
2
Rad: 0 |
θ
| π
Grad: 0 |
θ
| 100 Grad: 0 |
θ
| 200
0 Raises 10 to the power of x.
@ Enters the Euler Number
e (2.71…) to a power. The cursor will
then be placed at the exponent.
Example
Obtain a value of e
3
.
@ @ 3 E.
70
Chapter 5: Advanced Calculations — Advanced Keyboard
x Raises a preceding value to the power of -1. If no value is
preceded, then the cursor will be placed at the base.
_ Enters an a
th
root of a base. When a value precedes, then the
value will be incorporated as the index number. Otherwise, both
entry areas will be left blank.
+ Enters a square root; sets the cursor at the base entry area.
$ Enters π (3.14…).
~ Sets the following value as
θ
, assuming the preceding value is the
radius of the polar coordinates.
# Enters i (representing
-1
), to make imaginary or combination
numbers.
3. Calculations Using MATH Menu
The Advanced keyboard has considerably more MATH menu items to choose from
than that of the Basic keyboard:
A CALC Contains sub-menu tools for advanced calculations. To access
each sub-menu item, make sure that this A CALC menu item is
selected. Pressing the ' cursor key will extend the cursor to
the sub-menu items. Items can then be highlighted by scrolling
with {, }, ; or ', and selected by pressing
E, or simply use the short cut key stroke (i.e., select 01 by
pressing 0 and 1).
A sub-menu item with open parenthesis will need to be completed
by the closing parenthesis; failure to do so will result in an error.
01 log
2
log
2
value
Enters a base-2
logarithm (log
2
).
71
Chapter 5: Advanced Calculations — Advanced Keyboard
02 2
X
2
value
Raises 2 to a power. Sets the cursor to exponent.
03 fmin( fmin(
equation, lower limit of x, upper limit of x
)
Returns the value of
variable x when the
equation Y has the
minimum value within
the specified range of
x.
04 fmax( fmax(equation,
lower limit of x, upper limit of x
)
Return the value of variable x when the equation Y has
the maximum value within the specified range of x.
05 d/dx( d/dx(
equation, value of x [, tolerance]
)
Returns derivative of
equation Y at the
specified X value
using the tolerance (if
not specified, default
value is 1E–5).
06 ∫∫
equation, lower limit, upper limit [, tolerance]
dx
Calculates an integral
value of equation Y
from the lower limit to
the upper limit using
the specified toler-
ance (if not specified,
default value is 1E–5). Use in conjunction with the 07
dx sub-menu item.
Press the keys as follows in the Equation edit mode.
M A 0 6 2 { 8 ' (
X a 3 ' - 0.5 X y +
6 ) , 0.001 M A 0 7
E
07 dx Enters a differential
dx
in an integration expression.
72
Chapter 5: Advanced Calculations — Advanced Keyboard
08 ( (
expression, initial value, end value [, increment]
)
Returns the cumula-
tive sum of a given
expression from an
initial value to an end
value in the specified
increment value (if
not specified, default increment is 1).
09 sec sec
value
Enters a secant
function to be used in
a trigonometric
expression.
10 csc csc
value
Enters a cosecant (cosec) function to be used in a
trigonometric expression.
11 cot cot
value
Enters a cotangent (cotan) function to be used in a
trigonometric expression.
12 sec
-1
sec
-1
value
Enters an inverse
secant.
13 csc
-1
csc
-1
value
Enters an inverse
cosecant.
14 cot
-1
cot
-1
value
Enters an inverse cotangent.
15 sinh sinh
value
Enters a hyperbolic
sine.
16 cosh cosh
value
Enters a hyperbolic cosine.
17 tanh tanh
value
Enters a hyperbolic tangent.
73
Chapter 5: Advanced Calculations — Advanced Keyboard
18 sinh
-1
sinh
-1
value
Enters an inverse
hyperbolic sine.
19 cosh
-1
cosh
-1
value
Enters an inverse
hyperbolic cosine.
20 tanh
-1
tanh
-1
value
Enters an inverse hyperbolic tangent.
B NUM Use the sub-menu items below to convert a value. Refer to
“Chapter 3: Basic Calculation — Basic Keyboard” to learn how
these tools can be used.
1 abs( Returns the absolute value of a given number.
2 round( Returns a rounded value of a given term in parenthe-
ses. A rounding point can be specified.
3 ipart Returns only the integer part of a decimal number.
4 fpart Returns only the fraction part of a decimal number.
5 int Rounds a decimal number to the closest integer.
6 min( Finds and returns the minimum value within a list of
numbers.
7 max( Finds and returns the maximum value within a list of
numbers.
8 lcm( Returns the least common multiple of two integers.
9 gcd( Returns the greatest common divisor of two integers.
74
Chapter 5: Advanced Calculations — Advanced Keyboard
C PROB These sub-menu items are useful for probability calculations.
Refer to “Chapter 3: Basic Calculations — Basic Keyboard” for
details. A comprehensive list of menu items can be found in the
Appendix.
1 random Returns a random number form between 0 and 1.
2 rndInt( Returns a list of random integers, between a minimum
and a maximum value.
3 nPr Returns the total number of permutations for selecting
“r” items out of “n” items.
4 nCr Returns the total number of combinations for selecting
“r” items out of “n” items.
5 ! Returns a factorial.
D CONV These tools deal with conversions between different angle units
and between rectangular and polar coordinates.
1 deg
value (sexagesimal number)
deg
Takes a number in sexagesimal form, and converts it
into a decimal number.
2 dms
value (degrees)
dms
Takes a number in decimal form (in degrees), and
converts it into a sexagesimal number. To enter a
number in sexagesimal form, use items in the ANGLE
sub-menu, described in Chapter 3.
Rectangular/polar coordinate conversion
This calculator is equipped with rectangular coordinates and polar
coordinates conversion capabilities.
θ
r
x
y
75
Chapter 5: Advanced Calculations — Advanced Keyboard
Rectangular to polar coordinate conversion functions
Conversion formulas: r = (x
2
+ y
2
)
1/2
,
θ
=
tan
-1
(y/x)
3 xyr( xyr(
x coordinate, y coordinate
)
Returns polar
coordinate radius
value from X-Y
rectangular coordi-
nates.
4 xy→θ(xy→θ(
x coordinate, y coordinate
)
Returns polar
coordinate θ value
from X-Y rectangular
coordinates.
The following ranges
are used to find θ.
Degree mode: 0 |θ| 180
Radian mode: 0 |θ| 2π
Gradient mode: 0 |θ| 200
Polar to rectangular coordinate conversion functions
Conversion formulas: x = rcos
θ
, y = rsin
θ
5 rθ→x( rθ→x(
r coordinate,
θ
coordinate
)
Returns rectangular
coordinate X value
from r-θ polar
coordinates.
6 rθ→y( rθ→y(
r coordinate,
θ
coordinate
)
Returns rectangular
coordinate Y value
from r-θ polar
coordinates.
76
Chapter 5: Advanced Calculations — Advanced Keyboard
E ANGLE Use these tools to enter the symbols to specify angle units.
1 ° Inserts a symbol for “degrees”.
2 ’ Inserts a symbol for “minutes”.
3 ” Inserts a symbol for “seconds”.
4 r Enters an “r” symbol, to enter a number in radians.
5 g Enters an “g” symbol, to enter a number in gradients.
F INEQ Use the equality/inequality figures to compare two values. These
sub-item tools return 1 (true) or 0 (false).
1 = Tests whether a
preceding value and
a following value are
equal.
2
Tests whether a
preceding value and a following value are not equal.
3 > Tests whether a preceding value is larger than a
following value.
4
Tests whether a
preceding value is
larger than OR equal
to a following value.
5 < Tests whether a
preceding value is smaller than a following value.
6 Tests whether a preceding value is smaller than OR
equal to a following value.
77
Chapter 5: Advanced Calculations — Advanced Keyboard
G LOGIC Use the LOGIC sub-menu items to perform boolean operations.
In the N-base calculation mode (binary, octal, decimal and
hexadecimal), A LOGIC will directly appear when M is
pressed.
The following is the truth table of the combination of input A and
B:
AB
11
10
01
00
A and B
1
0
0
0
A or B
1
1
1
0
A xor B
0
1
1
0
A xnor B
1
0
0
1
A notA
10
01
The following examples show the answer screen when
executing a boolean operation for AND, OR, XOR,
XNOR between “1100” and “1010” in binary mode.
Compare the results (binary) to the above table.
1. Press # @ V A E to enter the binary,
octal, and hexadecimal calculation mode.
2. Press } } } to select the binary mode.
1 and
value A
and
value B
Enters an “AND” logic
figure.
1100 M 1
1010 E
2 or
value A
or
value B
Enters an “OR” logic
figure.
1100 M 2
1010 E
3 not not
value
Enters a “NOT” logic
figure.
M 3 10
E
78
Chapter 5: Advanced Calculations — Advanced Keyboard
4 neg neg
value
Enters a “neg” logic
figure.
M 4 1
E
Note: “4 neg” menu
appears only in the N-base calculation (binary, octal,
decimal and hexadecimal) mode.
5 xor
value A
xor
value B
Enters an Exclusive-
OR (xor) logic figure.
1100 M 5
1010 E
6 xnor
value A
xnor
value B
Enters an Exclusive-
NOR (xnor) logic
figure.
1100 M 6
1010 E
H COMPLX In order to use the sub-menu items within the COMPLX menu,
the calculator must be set up to handle complex numbers.
Otherwise the result will be a data type error.
Refer to the section “6. SETUP Menu” in this chapter for chang-
ing/verifying the calculator’s setup to enable complex number
answers, in either rectangular or polar coordinates.
1 conj( conj(
complex number
)
Returns the complex
conjugate of the
specified complex
number (or list of
complex numbers).
79
Chapter 5: Advanced Calculations — Advanced Keyboard
2 real( real(
complex number
)
Returns the real part
of a complex number
(or list of complex
numbers).
3 image( image(
complex number
)
Returns the imagi-
nary part of a
complex number (or
list of complex
numbers).
4 abs( abs(
complex number
)
Returns the absolute
value of a complex
number (or list of
complex numbers).
5 arg( arg(
complex number
)
Takes the coordi-
nates (x
+ yi), and
returns the θ.
Calculations using complex numbers
To calculate using complex numbers, select the sub-menu item 4
x ± yi or 5
r
θ
in the F ANSWER of the SETUP menu items.
The initial screen for the complex number calculation mode is the
same as for the real number mode.
Complex numbers can be noted using either 4 x ± yi (rectangular
coordinates) or 5
r
θ
(polar coordinates).
80
Chapter 5: Advanced Calculations — Advanced Keyboard
Example
Calculate (3 + 4i) × (4 6i)
Note: It is possible to input complex
numbers (i) in the real number
mode, however an error
message will return.
Functions available for complex number calculations
The following function keys are available for complex number
calculations without the limits existing in the real number calculations.
y, x, l, I, 0, @, a, +,
_
The following MATH menu functions are also available for
complex number calculations.
abs(, round(, ipart, fpart, int
4. More Variables: Single Value Variables and
LIST Variables
Additional single value variables (from A to Z, and θ) may be accessed. In addition, six
LIST variables (from L1 to L6) are readily accessible through the second function of
the Advanced Keyboard.
To save a list of numbers, follow the procedure below:
1.
On the Calculation screen (# ), create a list of numbers (“1,
2, 3”, in this example). Separate numbers with a comma
(,), and group the numbers with braces ({ and }).
2. Press R, then select
one of the six LIST variables.
To store the list in “L1”, press
@ 1 to call up the
LIST variable.
3. Pressing E will store the
list in the LIST variable. Note
that this procedure will
overwrite the list previously
stored in the LIST variable.
Refer to Chapter 9 “LIST Features” to learn more about how LIST
variables can be utilized.
81
Chapter 5: Advanced Calculations — Advanced Keyboard
5. TOOL Menu
The TOOL menu contains items to help calculating in different number systems, as
well as to help solve both linear and polynomial equation. Press @ V to
access the TOOL menu. Press the # key (or @ q) to escape from the
menu.
A NBASE Calculations can be performed in different number base systems,
while simultaneously converting the calculation result into
hexadecimal, decimal, octal, and binary systems.
1. While this menu item A
NBASE is selected, press
the E key. The NBASE
tool opens, with the cursor
set at HEX: (hexadecimal).
2. Type 1B | 9, for example. When entering the hexadecimal
B, simply press the B key; using the A key will call up
the variable B instead.
3. When done entering the
hexadecimal expression,
press E. The calculation
result will be displayed in
three other number base
systems, as well as in
hexadecimal format.
Note: Numerical values in binary, octal, and hexadecimal modes can be
expressed in the following number of digits:
Binary: 16 digits
Octal: 10 digits
Hexadecimal: 10 digits
If you enter a number exceeding the range specified above for
calculations or conversions, the calculator will return an error.
If the answer exceeds the above range, the calculator will also
return an error.
Decimals can be used for DEC mode only (. cannot be used
in the other modes). If you convert decimal values to binary,
octal, or hexadecimal number, the decimal part is discarded and
only the integer part is converted.
When numerical values of binary, octal, and hexadecimal modes
are negative, the display is switched to complements of 2.
82
Chapter 5: Advanced Calculations — Advanced Keyboard
B SYSTEM With this tool, linear equations containing up to 6 unknown values
(i.e., ax + by + cz + du + ev + fw = g
)
can be solved.
1. Press B to select B SYSTEM, and select the number of
unknown values. For example, press 2 if values x and y
are unknown.
2. In the next screen, an
equation ax
+ by = c is
displayed, with an entry
table for the known values —
a, b, and c.
3. Enter 2 sets of the known
values, as shown in the
figure. Pressing E at
each entry will store the
value, and sets the cursor at
the next entry area.
4. When done entering the
known values, press @
h. The calculation result
will be displayed on the next
screen.
Pressing C will bring back the previous entry screen.
5. To go back to the TOOL menu to perform another calculation,
press @ V.
C POLY This tool is designed so that quadratic (ax
2
+ bx + c = 0) or cubic
(ax
3
+ bx
2
+ cx + d = 0) equation may be solved.
1. Press C to select C
POLY, and select the degree.
For example, press 2 if
a quadratic equation is
desired.
2. In the next screen, an equation ax
2
+ bx + c = 0 is displayed,
with an entry area for the known values — a, b, and c.
83
Chapter 5: Advanced Calculations — Advanced Keyboard
3. Enter the values, as shown
in the screen to the right.
Pressing E at each
entry will store the value,
and sets the cursor at the
next entry area.
4. When done, press @ h to execute the calculation.
The results (i.e. the x-intersects) will be displayed.
5. To enter a different set of
numbers for a, b, and c,
press C to go back to
the previous screen. To
select a different degree of
polynomial, press @
V to go back to the TOOL menu.
If the solution cannot be displayed on the screen, a symbol will
appear at the bottom left corner of the screen. Press } to
scroll the screen.
6. SETUP Menu
Use the SETUP menu to verify the calculator’s current setup for mathematical and
scientific base units and the global editing style, as well as to change each
configuration.
It is very important that each item within this menu is properly set
up, or calculation results may not turn out as expected. For
example, entering 1
×
sin90 in the Calculation screen will result
as either “1” (when set to degree mode), or “0.893996663” (when
set to radian mode), or “0.98768834” (when set to gradient
mode). Refer to the “SETUP Menu” in Chapter 2 to learn about
each setup configuration.
84
Chapter 6
Advanced Graphing Features
— Advanced Keyboard
In this chapter, some real-life situations are featured. You are encouraged to modify
the examples to make your own graph schemes.
Note: To try the examples in this chapter, it is required that the Advanced Keyboard is
already set up by the user. To learn how to set up the Advanced Keyboard, read
“Changing the Keyboard” in Chapter 1.
It should be noted that the following examples assume that the angle mode is
set to Rad (radian), the default angle unit for the Advanced Keyboard. If set to
degree or gradient, some unexpected results will be obtained.
1. Try it!
You have just opened your own bank
account, with an initial deposit amount of
$2,000. Suppose your monthly income is
$3,000, and you will spend 60 percent of
what you have in the account every month,
how much will your balance be after one
year? How much will you have in the
account, 6 months from now?
The example can be expressed as a sequential equation, as
follows:
u
n
= u
n–1
× (1 0.6) + 3000
where u
n
is the balance of the current month and u
n–1
is the
balance of the previous month, and
n
is the month.
85
Chapter 6: Advanced Graphing Features — Advanced Keyboard
CONCEPT
1. Grasp the idea of sequential equations.
2. Use the graph tracing function to obtain approximate values.
PROCEDURE
1. First, let us set the calculator
to the appropriate graphing
coordinate mode. Press
@ ; to enter the
SETUP menu, press E
to select E COORD, then
press 4 to select 4 Seq, and press C.
2. We will use the “Time”
sequential graph type within
the FORMAT menu. Press
@ f, press G
to select G TYPE, and 2
to select 2 TIME.
3. Then press Y.
The Graph Equation Entry window will open.
4. Enter a new equation set
u(n-1)
× (1 - 0.6) + 3000 for
u(n)=
. Press @ u
(7) to enter u and
press X for n. Press
E when done entering.
Note: Press C to clear the previous entry.
Using a capitalized “U” or “N” here will result in an error upon
pressing the G key.
5. On the second entry row
(
u(nMin) =
), enter 2000,
then press E.
The figure is automatically
enclosed by braces.
6. The v and the w entry sets will not be necessary in this case,
so press C to clear, then press E to move one row
down. Repeat until the four unnecessary entry rows are
cleared.
86
Chapter 6: Advanced Graphing Features — Advanced Keyboard
7. Press G to draw the graph.
8. If the line is outside of the
graph’s range, press Z
then 1 to select
automatic zoom.
This will only display a small
portion of the graph, so the
graph’s range will need to be changed.
9. Press W. Find
n
Max=
and change the value to 15
(default: 10). Next, find
Xmax= and change the
value to 15 too (default: 10).
10
. Press the G key again.
11
. Use the graph trace function
by pressing U. As '
is pressed several times, the
n
value (=X value, since the
graph is set to “Time” format)
increases, and the Y value
(the balance of your ac-
count) will change. Find the
Y value when the
n
value is
6 (after 6 months) as well as
the value when n=12 (after 12 months = 1 year).
You can obtain the value directly from the CALC menu.
1. Press @ k and
select 1 VALUE.
n=
will appear on the bottom
line of the screen.
2. Enter the
n
value of 6, and
press E.
3. Follow the procedure 1 to 2 to obtain the Y value for 12.
87
Chapter 6: Advanced Graphing Features — Advanced Keyboard
2. Graphing Parametric Equations
A two-dimensional parametric equation assumes that both X and Y are represented
by functions in a third variable T. When set in parametric graphing mode, the calculator
automatically sets up the Graph Equation Entry screen to take one set of X and Y per
each graph, with the equation’s right side variable to be set as “T”.
Example
•Draw a graph: x(t) = 16cos(t), y(t) = 9sin(t).
1. Press @ ; to enter the SETUP menu.
2. Press E to select E
COORD, then 2 to
select 2 Param.
Be sure that the other
settings are as shown on the
right.
To exit the SETUP menu, press C.
3. Press Y to go to the Graph Equation Entry window.
4. Enter 16cos(t) for X1T=.
Press E when done
entering.
5. Enter 9sin(t) for Y1T=. Press
E when done entering.
Note: The right side variable is automatically set to “T”. When the X
key is pressed within the Graph Equation Entry window, it will
enter the variable “T”.
6. Press G to draw the graph.
7. If the graph line extends
beyond the screen, press
Z and select A ZOOM
then 1 AUTO.
Use 3 IN or 4 OUT of the A
ZOOM to adjust the drawing size.
You can also set the drawing size in the WINDOW menu by
determining the maximum and minimum values of T, X and Y.
88
Chapter 6: Advanced Graphing Features — Advanced Keyboard
3. Polar Graphing
Polar coordinates are a different method of specifying a point in two dimensions; the
location of the point is described by the distance from the X-Y intersect “r”, and its
elevation angle
θ
”.
Example
•Draw a graph: r = 16cos(
θ
)sin(
θ
).
1. Press @ ;.
The SETUP menu appears.
2. Press E to select E
COORD, then press 3
to select 3 Polar. Be sure
that the other settings are as
shown on the right.
To exit the SETUP menu,
press C.
3. Press Y.
The Graph Equation Entry window will appear.
4. At the first entry row R1=,
enter 16cos(
θ
) × sin(
θ
).
Press E.
5. Press G to draw the
graph.
Press Z, then press
6 to select 6 Square.
θ
r
89
Chapter 6: Advanced Graphing Features — Advanced Keyboard
4. Graphing Sequences
The sequence graph mode can store and simultaneously draw three graph equations
u(n), v(n), and w(n).
Variables u, v, and w are entered as @ u (or v, w).
Use X to enter the natural number n.
A sequence is an ordered set of numbers with a defined relation-
ship. The
recursive
sequential formulas can be described as
u
n
= u
n-1
+ d and/or
u
n
= u
n-1
× r
where u
n
is the n-th term, d is the common difference, and r is the
ratio. In many occasions however, the term before u
n-1
(i.e., one
term before u
n
) is not known. In such cases, the
explicit
formulas
must then be derived as:
u
n
= u
1
+ d × (n - 1) and/or
u
n
= u
1
× r
n-1
where u
n
is the n-th term, u
1
is the first term of the sequence, d is
the common difference, and r is the ratio.
A sequence {2, 4, 8, 16, 32, ...} may suggest the following
recursive sequence expression:
u
n
= 2 × 2
n-1
or it may also suggest the following non-recursive expression:
u
n
= 2
n
The calculator can plot sequential graphs in three different
schemes, as follows:
n
-based (Time)
The u
n
values will be plotted
against the n value.
90
Chapter 6: Advanced Graphing Features — Advanced Keyboard
phase-based (uv, uw, or vw)
The u
n
values will be plotted against the v
n
values (uv).
(n
1
)-based (Web)
The u
n
values will be plotted against the u
n-1
value.
Note: When u
n–2
is incorporated in to the equation, the
u(nMin)
requires two values: the minimum, and the second smallest. For
example, you will need {0, 1} in the
u(nMin)
entry row if
u(n
1)
+
u(n
2)
is entered as the equation.
When Web is selected, n – 2 cannot be referred to. n
also
cannot be directly referred to; entering u(n–1) + n will result in
an error.
Before entering graphing sequences, the calculator’s graphing
coordinates will need to be set up:
1. Press @ ;. The SETUP menu appears.
2. Press E to select E COORD, then press 4 to select 4
Seq.
3. Press C to exit the SETUP menu.
Example 1:
n
-based Graphing (Time)
•Draw a sequential graph of u
n
= 2 × 2
n–1
.
First, make sure that the graph coordinate mode is set to
sequential (see above.)
1. Press @ f to open the FORMAT menu. The FORMAT
menu allows user to change the graph configurations.
2. When the menu appears, select the item G TYPE.
3. Press 2 to select 2
Time.
91
Chapter 6: Advanced Graphing Features — Advanced Keyboard
4. Now, go to the Graph Equation Entry window by pressing
Y.
The cursor is set at the first line u(
n
); pressing C will clear
any previous entry, as well as to put the cursor at the right side
of the equation.
5. Enter 2
× 2
n-1
. Use the X
key to enter n. When done,
press E. The cursor
moves down to the second
row.
6. In the entry area u(nMin)=,
enter the minimum value of
the n, 1, then press E.
7. Press the G key.
8. Press Z, then press
1 to select 1 Auto
(automatic zoom).
9. Press the U key, then
use the ' key to trace the graph.
Example 2: Phase-based Graphing (uv)
Compare 2
× 0.9
n-1
with the previously entered sequence.
Phase-based graphing requires a set of two sequential equations.
Since we already have one entered as above, we will create
another one here, but first the sequential graph format will need
to be set to uv.
1. Press @ f to enter the FORMAT menu, then press
G to select G TYPE.
2. Select uv by pressing 3.
3. Press Y to go to the
Graph Equation Entry
window.
92
Chapter 6: Advanced Graphing Features — Advanced Keyboard
The calculator can accept up to three sequential equation
entries. We will use the v set, since the u set already has an
entry. Move the cursor down to the v(n) entry area, and press
C.
4. Enter 2
× 0.9
n-1
, then press
E.
The cursor will be set to the
fourth entry row v(nMin=).
5. Press C, then enter 1.
6. Press the G key to draw
the graph, then zoom the
graph so that it be comes
visible (Z, 1 Auto).
7. Use the U function to
trace the graph. Press the ' key to trace the plotted graph
values.
When w, the third sequential equation set is entered, it can also
be compared with the two other equations; simply set the TYPE
under the FORMAT menu to either 4 uw to compare the first set
with the third, or 5 vw to compare the second and the third.
Note: Comparing a sequence with an empty set will result in an
error. If the v set is to be used, then the equation entry rows
will need to have appropriate entries.
Example 3:
n-1
-based Graphing (Web)
Compare the u(n–1) value against the u(n) value of u(n-1) + 100.
This particular graph equation requires an index to the previous
term (u
n-1
).
1. Press @ f to enter
the FORMAT menu, then
press G to select G
TYPE.
2. Select 1 Web by pressing
1.
93
Chapter 6: Advanced Graphing Features — Advanced Keyboard
3. Press the Y key to go to the Graph Equation Entry
window.
4. At the first equation entry
row, enter u(n - 1) + 100.
When done entering, press
E.
5. At the next entry row, make
sure that it has the starting value “0”.
6. Bring the cursor down, and clear the rest of the four rows.
7. Press G, then press Z, 1 Auto to view the graph.
Two diagonal parallel lines should appear; the top line repre-
sents the n value, while the
n–1 value is represented by
the line below.
8. Press U to trace the
graph. As ' is pressed,
you will see the traced points
connected with lines, indicating the comparison between the n
and n–1 values.
5. The CALC Function
The CALC function utilizes the entered graph equation to calculate values. In
conjunction with the 4 graph coordinates, it can be called up anywhere. Note however
that the CALC function will not do anything if no graph equation has been entered or
specified.
The following is an example that uses the previously entered
polar graph equations above.
1. First, verify the graph
coordinate mode by pressing
@ ;; check to see if
E COORD is set to Polar. If
not, this will need to be
changed accordingly. Also,
make sure the angle unit B DRG is set to Rad. Otherwise the
graph will not be drawn correctly.
94
Chapter 6: Advanced Graphing Features — Advanced Keyboard
2. Press Y to verify the
previously entered polar
graph equation, then press
G to draw the graph.
Adjust the view by using
Z menu items.
3. Press @ k.
4. Press 1 to select 1
Value. The graph is drawn
back on the screen again,
with the θ= prompt visible at
the bottom left side of the screen.
5. Enter the θ value at the
prompt. Enter π, for example.
Be aware that θ cannot be
more than 2π (2π radians =
360 degrees).
6. Upon pressing E, the radian
r
coordinate will be calcu-
lated.
Note: When coordinate system is Polar, Param or Seq, only 1 Value is
selectable in the CALC menu.
See Chapter 4 “Basic Graphing Features — Basic Keyboard” on
pages 60 to 61 for details of the other sub-menu tools available.
7 Inflec Calculates the inflection point of the given graph and moves the
cursor to that point.
Example
1. Enter the graph equation
Y1 = x
3
3x
2
+ 2.
2. Press @ k 7.
Advanced
keyboard
specific sub-
menus
95
Chapter 6: Advanced Graphing Features — Advanced Keyboard
6. Format Setting
You can set up the Graph screen format from the
FORMAT menu.
Press @ f to display the Graph format
menu.
Note: G TYPE appears only when the sequence coordinate graph mode
is selected.
A –––––– Displays the current FORMAT settings. The default setting is:
OFF (for the graph equation to be displayed on the
graph)
OFF (for displaying numeric derivatives on the graph)
ON (for displaying the X/Y axis on the graph)
OFF (for displaying a grid on the graph)
RectCoord (for displaying the cursor location)
B EXPRES This sets whether or not graph equations are displayed on the
graph screen. To display the equations on the graph, select 1 ON
by pressing 1 at this menu item.
C Y’ The numeric derivative (dx/dy) can be displayed on the graph
screen. To activate this function, select 1 ON by pressing 1
at this menu item.
D AXIS The graph axis can be set invisible with this menu item. To hide
the X/Y axis of the graph, select 2 OFF by pressing 2 at this
menu item.
E GRID The graph display can be backed with an X-Y grid. To show the
grid on the graph, select 1 ON by pressing 1 at this menu
item.
Advanced keyboard
specific sub-menus
96
Chapter 6: Advanced Graphing Features — Advanced Keyboard
F CURSOR The coordinate system that indicates.
The location selected by the trace or other function can be
selected from 1 RectCoord (Rectangular coordinates) or 2
PolarCoord (Polar coordinates) (In the parametric system, the T
indication is added.)
G TYPE This menu is only active when the sequence coordinate graph
mode is selected in the SETUP menu. The G TYPE menu will not
appear in the other modes.
1 Web A web graph plot mode where x = u(n-1) and y = u(n).
2 Time Time graph plot mode where x = n and y = u(n), v(n),
w(n). (default)
3 uv A uv mode where x = u(n) and y = v(n).
4 uw A uw mode where x = u(n) and y = w(n).
5 vw A vw mode where x = v(n) and y = w(n).
Note: u(n), v(n) and w(n) indicate the n-th term of the
sequences.
7. Zoom Functions
Displays the ZOOM menu. Within the ZOOM menu,
various preferences can be set for the graph
appearance on zooming in and out.
See Chapter 4 “Basic Graphing Features — Basic Keyboard” on
pages 53 to 56 for details of the other menu items and their sub-
menu items.
Advanced
keyboard
specific sub-
menus
97
Chapter 6: Advanced Graphing Features — Advanced Keyboard
D EXP
2
e
x
Use this tool when the equation contains a form of “e
x
”.
4 In X Use this tool when the equation contains a form of “In
x”.
E TRIG
4 sin
–1
X Use this when the equation contains an arc sine
function.
5 cos
–1
X Use this when the equation contains an arc cosine
function.
6 tan
–1
X Use this when the equation contains an arc tangent
function.
F HYP
1 sinh X Use this when the equation contains a hyperbolic sine
function.
2 cosh X Use this when the equation contains a hyperbolic
cosine function.
3 tanh X Use this when the equation contains a hyperbolic
tangent function.
4 sinh
-1
X Use this when the equation contains an inverse
hyperbolic sine function.
5 cosh
-1
X Use this when the equation contains an inverse
hyperbolic cosine function.
6 tanh
-1
X Use this when the equation contains an inverse
hyperbolic tangent function.
98
Chapter 6: Advanced Graphing Features — Advanced Keyboard
8. Setting a Window
The W key displays the graph window setup. The display will differ according to
the selected coordinate system. See also Chapter 4 “Basic Graphing Features —
Basic Keyboard” on pages 57 to 58 for details of rectangular coordinate system
settings.
Rectangular coordinate system
Xmin/Xmax Minimum and maximum values
of x-axis, respectively
Xscale Scale of x-axis
Ymin/Ymax Minimum and maximum values
of y-axis, respectively
Yscale Scale of y-axis
Parametric coordinate system
Tmin/Tmax Minimum and maximum values
for T, respectively
Tscale Cursor pointer step value for
tracing
Others Same as rectangular coordinate
system
Polar coordinate system
θmin/θmax Minimum and maximum angle
for
θ
,
respectively
θstep Cursor pointer step value for
tracing
Others Same as rectangular coordinate
system
Sequential coordinate system
n
Min/
n
Max Minimum and maximum value
for
n
, respectively
PlotStart Starting value of sequential
variable
n
PlotStep Increments of sequential
variable
n
Others Same as rectangular coordinate system
99
Chapter 6: Advanced Graphing Features — Advanced Keyboard
9. Tables
The calculator enables you to illustrate the changes using the equation and graph you
have input. It also has tables for showing a list of X and Y values. Each column item
can display up to 7 digits, including a sign and/or a decimal point.
There are four kinds of tables available corresponding to the coordinate system.
Rectangular coordinate system
The variable X is displayed in
the left end column.
The columns Y1 to Y3 are
displayed on the first screen.
Press ; ' to
horizontally scroll the table. (The variable X is always displayed
in the left end column.)
The 10-digit value in the column where the cursor is currently
located is displayed on the bottom line of the screen.
•Move the cursor using ; ' { }.
Non-input equation numbers and equations invalid for graphing
will not be displayed in the above table.
Parametric coordinate system
The variable T is displayed in
the left end column.
The columns X1T, Y1T, and
X2T are displayed on the first
screen.
Press ; ' to horizontally scroll the table.
The 10-digit value in the column where the cursor is currently
located is displayed on the bottom line of the screen.
•Move the cursor using ; ' { }.
Non-input equation numbers and equations invalid for graphing
will not be displayed in the above table.
100
Chapter 6: Advanced Graphing Features — Advanced Keyboard
Polar coordinate system
The variable θ is displayed in
the left end column.
The columns θ, R1 to R3 are
displayed on the first screen.
Press ; ' to
horizontally scroll the table.
The 10-digit value in the column where the cursor is currently
located is displayed on the bottom line of the screen.
The cursor can be moved using ; ' { }.
Non-input equation numbers and equations invalid for graphing
will not be displayed in the above table.
Sequential coordinate system
The variable
n
is displayed in
the left end column.
•Tables values u(
n
), v(
n
), and
w (
n
) are simultaneously
displayed.
The 10-digit value in the column where the cursor is currently
located is displayed on the bottom line of the screen.
The cursor can be moved using ; ' { }.
Non-input equation numbers and equations invalid for graphing
will not be displayed in the above table.
Setting a table
•To display the table, press T.
•Table setting allows you set how to input data for a table.
Press @ y to enter
the table setting screen.
The cursor is initially located
at Auto, showing the variable
input method.
Auto: Automatically creates a table based on the graph equations and
given TableStart and TableStep values.
101
Chapter 6: Advanced Graphing Features — Advanced Keyboard
User: Displays a blank table. As you input values for variable columns,
table values are automatically calculated by the equation. Thus,
although TableStart and TableStep inputs can be made when
selecting User, set values will be ignored.
Press ; or ' to switch between Auto and User.
•TableStart is a start value of the variable in the table, and
Ta bleStep is a step value of the variable. Both are numeric
values.
Example
Automatically create a table starting from
-5 with a step of 1 in the
X-Y coordinate after equations, based on “Y1 = X”, “Y2 = X
2
”, and
“Y3 =
-X
2
+ 3”.
1. Press @ y and
} _ 5 E 1
E.
2. Press T.
* If the cursor is on the top or
bottom line of the table, { or } can still be used. The
table contents will move to become visible in the display area.
Example
Create a table in the User mode under the above conditions.
1. Press @ y and
' E } 0 E
1 E.
2. Press T.
Blank table will appear.
3. Press 2 E _ 3
E to enter X values.
* An automatically created table in the User mode cannot be
scrolled vertically.
102
Chapter 6: Advanced Graphing Features — Advanced Keyboard
10. The DRAW Function
With the DRAW function, lines, circles, graphs, and pixel points can be added to the
graph window. The DRAW menu also contains configuration tools for the ordinary
graphs entered in the Graph Equation Entry window: line types, shading, and visibility
status of each graph.
Press @ d to enter the DRAW menu.
Note: When entering coordinates, the DRAW function assumes that
rectangular coordinates will be entered. The exception to this is
for PxlON(, PxlOFF(, PxlCHG(, and PxlTST(, all within the B
POINT menu item.
A DRAW The tools in this menu add lines, circles, additional graphs and
text on the graph screen.
The tools below can be accessed from the GRAPH window, or
any other windows such as the Graph Equation Entry window and
Calculation screen. Most of these tools, such as Line(, can be
entered directly onto a graph from the cursor point.
1 ClrDraw Clears all items on the graph window EXCEPT for the
graphs entered via the Graph Equation Entry window.
1. From the GRAPH
window, press
@ d to
enter the DRAW
menu.
2. Press A to select A DRAW, then press 1
to select 1 ClrDraw.
or
1. From the Calculation screen, press @ d
A 1.
“ClrDraw” will appear.
2. Press E.
All the items on the graph will be deleted and the
message “Done” will appear.
103
Chapter 6: Advanced Graphing Features — Advanced Keyboard
2 Line( Draws a line according to the given X-Y coordinates of
a start/end point.
Note: This tool can be used with any type of graph.
Line(x-coordinate of start point, y-coordinate of
start point, x-coordinate of end point, y-coordinate
of end point [,0])
Example
1. Select the DRAW
menu. Select A
DRAW in the
menu, then select
2 Line(.
“Line(” will appear.
Suppose you wish to draw a line, starting from an
X-Y coordinate (1,2) to end at (8,8).
2. Enter “1,2,8,8”
right after the
“Line(” object,
then close the
expression with
).
3. Press E.
The GRAPH window will appear with the specified
line drawn on the graph.
Note: If you enter 0 for the 5th element of Line( function, (e.g.
Line(1,2,8,8,0)) and press E, you can clear the
specified line.
Line(
1. Press @
d to enter the
DRAW menu.
From the Calculation
screen
From the GRAPH
window
104
Chapter 6: Advanced Graphing Features — Advanced Keyboard
2. Press A to select A DRAW, then press 2
to select 2 Line(.
The GRAPH
window reap-
pears, with the
coordinate of the
cursor showing at
the bottom of the
screen.
Note: To change the cursor coordinate system, use the
FORMAT menu. Select B CURSOR, then select the
required coordinate system for the cursor.
3. Move the flashing cursor on the screen to set the
starting point of the line.
Note: The pixel increment can be set within the ZOOM menu.
While A ZOOM is selected, choose 7 Dec to set each
pixel size to “0.1
× 0.1”, or 8 Int to set to “1 × 1”.
4. When the starting
point is set, press
E to anchor
the location.
5. Move the cursor
to indicate the end
point of the line.
When set, press
E to finalize
the line drawing.
6. You may draw as many lines as you wish, by
repeating the procedure from 4 to 5. When done
drawing, press C to exit the entry mode.
105
Chapter 6: Advanced Graphing Features — Advanced Keyboard
H_Line
Example
•Draw a horizontal line manually.
1. Press @
d A
3.
2. Use the cursor
navigation keys
({ } ; ') to move the flashing
cursor to the appropriate position.
3. Press E to draw the line.
4 V_line Draws a vertical line on the graph window.
V_Line
x-value
Draws a vertical line (
x = value
) on the graph
window.
Example
•Draw a horizontal line of x = 3.
1. Press @ d A 4 and enter the
value 3.
H_Line
y-value
Draws a horizontal line (
y = value
) on the graph
window.
Example
•Draw a horizontal line of y = 5.
1. Press @
d A
3 and enter
the value 5.
3 H_line Draws a horizontal line on the graph window.
From the GRAPH
window
From the Calculation
screen
From the Calculation
screen
106
Chapter 6: Advanced Graphing Features — Advanced Keyboard
T_line(
equation, x-value
)
Example
•Draw the tangental line of y = x
2
at x = 1.
1. Select T_Line(.
2. Enter “x
2
, 1)” on
the line.
3. Press E.
Note: It is also possible to
specify a function
equation from Y0 to
Y9 if stored.
(T_line(Y1, 1))
T_line(
Example
•Draw a tangental line by manually specifying the
point.
1. Select T_Line(.
2. Use ; ' to move the flashing cursor on
the targeted graph line.
Use { } to select a graph to draw the
tangental line.
3. When the point is set at the tangent point, press
E.
V_Line
Example
•Draw a vertical line manually.
1. Press @ d A 4.
2. Use the cursor navigation keys ({ } ;
') to move the flashing cursor to the appropri-
ate position.
3. Press E to draw the line.
5 T_line( Draws a tangental line at the specified point of a graph
curve.
From the Calculation
screen
From the GRAPH
window
From the GRAPH
window
107
Chapter 6: Advanced Graphing Features — Advanced Keyboard
6 Draw Draw
equation
Draws an additional graph based on a given expres-
sion.
Example
•Draw the graph of y = 3x
2
-4x+2.
1. Select Draw.
2. Enter “3x
2
4x+2”
on the line.
3. Press E.
Note: This tool can be used
with rectangular coordinate graphs only.
7 Shade( Shade(
equation1, equation2 [, lower value, upper
value]
)
Draws two graphs, and shades the area between the
two. If the x range is specified, it shades the area within
the specified range.
Example
Shade the area enclosed by y =
1
4
x
2
– 8 and y = x.
1. Select Shade(.
2. Enter “
1
4
x
2
8,
x)” on the line.
3. Press E.
Example
Shade the area enclosed by y =
1
4
x
2
– 8 and y = x
within the range of –2 x 3.
Before starting operation, Select ClrDraw to clear the
graphs previously drawn.
1. Select Shade(.
2. Enter “
1
4
x
2
8, x,
-2, 3)” on the line.
3. Press E.
Note: It is also possible to
specify a function equation from Y0 to Y9 if stored.
108
Chapter 6: Advanced Graphing Features — Advanced Keyboard
8 DrawInv DrawInv
equation
Draws an inverse of a given graph expression.
Example
•Draw the inverse graph of y =
1
4
x
2
– 8.
1. Select DrawInv.
2. Enter “
1
4
x
2
8”
on the line.
3. Press E.
Note: It is also possible to
specify a function equation from Y0 to Y9 if stored.
9 Circle( Draw a circle on the graph screen.
Circle(
x-coordinate of center, y-coordinate of
center, radius
)
Example
•Draw a circle with center at (2,3) and of radius 7.
1. Select Circle(.
2. Enter “2,3,7)” on
the line.
3. Press E.
Note: Before drawing a
circle, press Z A 6 to set the X-Y
coordinates to square.
Circle(
Example
•Draw a circle manually.
1. Select Circle(.
2. Move the cursor to set the center point of the circle.
Press E to set the anchor.
3. Move the cursor to determine the radius length of
the circle.
4. When done, press
E.
The circle is
drawn at the
location.
From the Calculation
screen
From the GRAPH
window
109
Chapter 6: Advanced Graphing Features — Advanced Keyboard
0 Text( Text(
column, row,
strings
”)
Enters a text string at a given coordinate.
Example
•Draw “HELLO” on the graph at column 2, row 1.
Text(2, 1, “HELLO”)
Note: Use M E
3 E to enter
“”(double quotes).
Column and row definitions for text input
* Refer to the following diagram to specify the
coordinates where you wish to start writing the text.
Note: Lines, points, and curves drawn by the Draw menu are handled
as pictures. Therefore, they cannot be traced.
Graphs drawn by the Draw menu are automatically cleared if any
screen settings are changed. To save the graph, use the StoPict
menu.
B POINT Utilize these tools to manage point drawing and deletion on the
graph.
There are two operation methods. One is to directly move the
cursor pointer to the location on the graph screen where you wish
to insert the point. The other is to call a relevant command on the
Calculation screen and to directly input the coordinates to draw or
delete the point. (X and Y coordinates should be separated by a
comma.)
(0,0)(30,0)
(0,9)(30,9)
column
row
110
Chapter 6: Advanced Graphing Features — Advanced Keyboard
1 PntON( PntON(
x-coordinate, y-coordinate
)
Draws a point at a given coordinate. It takes the X-Y
coordinate as an argument.
This tool can either be accessed from the GRAPH
window or other windows. Entering from the GRAPH
window enables a graphic entry, while entering from
other windows enables text-based entry.
2 PntOFF( PntOFF(
x-coordinate, y-coordinate
)
Erases a pixel point. It takes the X-Y coordinate as an
argument.
3 PntCHG( PntCHG(
x-coordinate, y-coordinate
)
Changes the status (i.e., visible/invisible) of a pixel at a
given coordinate. Deletes the point when it is displayed
and draws the point when it is not displayed.
4 PxlON( PxlON(
column, row
)
Draws a pixel point at a given screen location indicated
by column and row.
The column and row definitions are as follows:
Column: 0 to 132,
Row: 0 to 64.
(0, 0) (126, 0)
(0, 62) (126, 62)
column
132
This area cannot be specified
64
row
5 PxlOFF( PxlOFF(
column, row
)
Erases a pixel point at a given screen location indi-
cated by column and row.
6 PxlCHG( PxlCHG(
column, row
)
Changes the status (i.e., visible/invisible) of a pixel at a
given screen location indicated by column and row.
111
Chapter 6: Advanced Graphing Features — Advanced Keyboard
7 PxlTST( PxlTST(
column, row
)
Returns “1” if a pixel point is present at a given screen
location indicated by column and row.
Returns "0" if no pixel point exists.
C ON/OFF Sets the visibility status of a given graph number (0-9).
1 DrawON DrawON [
equation number 1
, ....] or DrawON
Sets the specified graphs visible. If no argument is
given, then all graphs will be set visible.
2 DrawOFF DrawOFF [
equation number 1
, ....] or DrawOFF
Sets the specified graphs invisible. If no argument is
given, then all graphs will be set invisible.
Example
Set Y1 and Y2 to visible and Y3 to invisible.
1. Press @ d C 1.
2. Enter “1, 2” for equation numbers.
3. Press E.
4. Press @ d C 2.
5. Enter 3 for
equation number.
6. Press E.
112
Chapter 6: Advanced Graphing Features — Advanced Keyboard
E G_DATA All graph data, including the graph equations and window
settings, can be stored in 10 graph storage areas (1-9, and 0),
which can be called up later.
1 StoGD StoGD
number (0-9)
Saves the graph data.
Example
Store the current graph data in location #1.
Note: The lines, graphs and
pixels drawn with the
A DRAW tools will
not be saved here;
use StoPict under F
PICT instead.
2 RclGD RclGD
number (0-9)
Recalls the saved graph data.
Example
Call back the previously stored graph data from
location #1.
D LINE Sets the line appearance of each graph. Each graph coordinate
mode (i.e., rectangular, polar, etc.) can retain a set of line
appearance preferences. Solid line, dotted line, bold line, locus
and dots can be selected.
1. Press @ d D to select D LINE, then press
E.
2. The next window enables
you to select the line types
of each graph in the set
coordinate mode. (The
rectangular coordinate mode
is selected in this example.)
Use the cursor keys to select
the required line type, and
press E.
113
Chapter 6: Advanced Graphing Features — Advanced Keyboard
Note: Attempting to call
back graph data from
an empty location will
result in an error.
F PICT Stores and recalls the displayed pixel data for the graph window.
The graph equations will not be saved or recalled with these
tools.
1 StoPict StoPict
number (0-9)
Saves the pixel data.
Example
Store the current graph, including the drawings, in
location #1.
2 RclPict RclPict
number (0-9)
Recalls the saved pixel data.
Example
Call back the previously stored graph data from
location #1.
114
Chapter 6: Advanced Graphing Features — Advanced Keyboard
G SHADE With these sub-menu tools, inequalities, intersections and
compliments of multiple graphs can be visualized.
1 SET Sets up the shading area for each graph. Refer to “3.
Other Useful Graphing Features” in Chapter 4 of this
manual to learn how to utilize this tool.
2 INITIAL Initializes the shading setup, and brings up the shading
setup window.
11. Substitution Feature
Refer to the page 63 for details.
As for the Advanced keyboard, you can rewrite the equation based on the numeric
values input on the substitution feature screen.
Example
Follow the step 1 on page 65:
1. Press @ h to return
to the equation display
screen.
The equation is written
based on the last numeric
values input on the substitu-
tion feature screen.
* Once @ h have been pressed, the screen cannot
be returned to the previous substitution feature screen.
115
Chapter 7
SLIDE SHOW Feature
The SLIDE SHOW feature is especially incorporated to help students understand
math concepts utilizing the calculator’s graphing capabilities. With this feature, the
calculator’s screen images can be captured, organized, and stored.
The SLIDE SHOW feature is designed to be used with SHARP’s optional overhead
projection system, which offers a hassle-free math presentation environment for the
entire class.
The SLIDE SHOW can be used in both Basic and Advanced mode.
To enter the SLIDE SHOW, press ] . To exit the SLIDE SHOW feature, press
#.
1. Try it!
Make a SLIDE SHOW named “CUBIC” to
explain how to draw the graph of a factor-
base cubic function and explain how to solve
cubic equations using factors. Use the
following cubic function as a sample.
y = (x
3)(x 1)(x + 2)
1. Set up a SLIDE SHOW file.
Press ] to enter the SLIDE SHOW menu.
2. Press C E to select C NEW.
3. Name your project (type “CUBIC, for example), and press
E.
Create a new
SLIDE SHOW
116
Chapter 7: SLIDE SHOW Feature
4. Press Y to enter the graph equation mode.
5. Enter (x 3)(x 1)(x + 2) at
the first equation.
6. Press @ n.
The message “STORE
SCREEN: 01” will appear.
The image will be stored on
page 1 of the SLIDE SHOW
“CUBIC, and the screen will
automatically return to the
previous screen.
Each time you press @ n, the screen image will be
captured and stored in the SLIDE SHOW.
7. Press G.
Note: •You cannot capture an image
while drawing.
If the cursor flashes at the
upper right corner of the
screen, the calculator is busy processing tasks. The SLIDE
SHOW feature cannot capture images during this period.
•A captured image cannot be recaptured.
8. After the graph is drawn, press @ n.
The image will be stored on page 2 of the SLIDE SHOW
“CUBIC”.
9. Press @ " to split
the screen between the
graph and the table.
10
. After drawing is done, press
@ n.
The screen image is stored on page 3.
11
. Press ' once, and press @ n. Continue this
operation.
Capture images
117
Chapter 7: SLIDE SHOW Feature
Playing back the newly created SLIDE SHOW
1. Press ] to go to the
SLIDE SHOW menu.
Press B to select B
PLAY.
A list of saved SLIDE SHOW
projects will be shown.
2. Select the one you want to play back, either by using the
shortcut key strokes, or by moving the cursor. (Select the item
and press E.)
The first page of the SLIDE
SHOW will appear.
The number appearing at
the upper right of the screen
is the slide number.
3. Use the } key or E to display the next image; press
the { key to show the previous image.
Rearranging the captured images
Let’s change the last image of the SLIDE SHOW feature to before
the third.
1. Press ] to bring up the SLIDE SHOW menu.
2. Press D to select D
SELECT.
3. Choose the project you want
to edit from the sub-menu
list.
4. Press E to select.
The target SLIDE SHOW will be selected.
5. Press ] E to select
E EDIT, then press 1 to
select 1 MOVE.
The first image of the
selected SLIDE SHOW file
appears.
Select an image
Select a file
118
Chapter 7: SLIDE SHOW Feature
6. Go down to the last captured
image using the } key.
7. Press E to mark the
image.
8. Go up to the page 3 using
the { key.
9. Press E.
The marked image will be
inserted at page 3.
2. The SLIDE SHOW menu
This section of the chapter
summarizes each item in the
SLIDE SHOW feature menu.
A CURR Displays the name of the
currently selected or working
SLIDE SHOW. Press @ n to capture an image.
B PLAY Enables you to select a SLIDE SHOW file for playback.
C NEW Creates a new SLIDE SHOW file to store screen images.
D SELECT Enables you to select a SLIDE
SHOW file to be edited and
display its name in the A CURR
window.
E EDIT Enables you to move/delete captured images, or change the file
name of the current SLIDE SHOW.
Note: If no SLIDE SHOW file is stored, selecting any of the following
sub-menu items will result in an error.
1 MOVE
With this sub-menu tool, a selected screen image can be moved,
so that the playback order will change. To escape from this mode
and go back to the SLIDE SHOW menu, press the ] key.
Specify the
insertion point
119
Chapter 7: SLIDE SHOW Feature
1. While in the SLIDE SHOW menu, press E to select E
EDIT, then press 1 to select the 1 MOVE sub-menu item.
2. With the { and } cursor keys, select the captured
image you wish to move, then press E .
3. Select the position to which you wish to move the previously
selected image using the { and } cursor keys.
4. Pressing E will place the selected image at the new
location. The selected image will be placed immediately before
the current screen.
2 DEL
This sub-menu tool deletes the selected image captured in the
SLIDE SHOW.
1. While in the SLIDE SHOW
menu, press E to select
E EDIT, then press 2 to
select the 2 DEL sub-menu
item.
2. With the { and } cursor keys, select the image you
wish to delete.
3. Press E to remove the selected image from the SLIDE
SHOW file.
3 RENAME
Use this sub-menu tool to rename the SLIDE SHOW.
1. In the SLIDE SHOW menu, press E to select E EDIT, then
press 3 to select the 3 RENAME sub-menu item.
2. The following screen enables you to change the SLIDE SHOW
name.
3. Type the new name.
The default input mode is A-LOCK.
If you wish to incorporate numbers, press the A key to
enter numbers.
To switch back into the ALPHA mode, press A again.
4. Pressing E will store the new SLIDE SHOW name.
120
Chapter 8
Matrix Features
Within the Matrix features, up to ten different matrices can be entered.
To get to the Matrix features, press @ m. Define and edit the matrices within
this mode too.
1. Try it!
Three equations can be derived as follows, containing three
unknown quantities:
3x + 2y + z = 39
2x + 3y + z = 34
x
+ 2y + 3z = 26
x, y and z represent the price for each sheaf of the first, second
and third class crops, respectively.
You can solve the above system of linear equations by using a
matrix.
CONCEPT
1. Enter the coefficients as elements in a matrix.
2. Use the rrowEF function to obtain the reduced row echelon
form.
Three sheaves of the first class crop, two of the
second, and one of the third are sold for 39
dollars. Two of the first, three of the second and,
one of the third for 34 dollars. And one of the
first, two of the second and three of the third for
26 dollars. How much did you receive from each
sheaf of the first, second and third class crops?
(Chapter VIII of Chiu Chang Suan Shu - Nine
Chapters of Arithmetic Arts, 200 B.C., China)
121
Chapter 8: Matrix Features
1. Press @ m to enter
the MATRIX menu.
2. Press B to select EDIT
and then 1 to select 1
mat A.
3. Press 3 E 4 E to
define the dimensions of the
matrix (3 rows
× 4 columns).
4. Press 3 E 2 E 1
E 3 9 E to enter the
first row of 3x + 2y + z = 39.
The cursor will automatically
position itself at the begin-
ning of the second row.
5. Press 2 E 3 E 1 E 3 4 E to enter the second
row of 2x
+ 3y + z = 34.
6. Press 1 E 2 E 3
E 2 6 E to enter the
third row of x
+ 2y + 3z = 26.
7. Press # to return to the
calculation screen.
Matrix A is now set.
8. Press @ m to display the MATRIX MENU, and press
D to select D MATH and then press 4 to select 4
rrowEF. The reduced row
echelon form is now set, as
shown:
9. Press @ m, then
press A to select NAME
and press 1 to select 1
mat A. The Matrix A is now set and ready to be calculated.
PROCEDURE
Define
dimensions
Enter the values
Solve the
problem
Select a matrix
to edit
122
Chapter 8: Matrix Features
10
. Press E.
The reduced row echelon form of the matrix is displayed.
Display Solution
1x + 0y + 0z = x = 9.25
0x + 1y + 0z = y = 4.25
0x
+ 0y + 1z = z = 2.75
2. Entering and Viewing a Matrix
Up to 5 rows by 3 columns of elements can be displayed on the
screen.
Press ; ' { } to scroll the matrix. Use row
and column numbers on the left and upper side of the matrix to
check the display location.
If the dimensions of the matrix have previously been defined,
the values will be displayed. You can retain or alter the dimen-
sions accordingly.
Matrix name
Matrix dimensions (row
×
column)
Element entry field
Input field (bottom line)
1. Press @ m, then press B (select EDIT) and
select the matrix you want to define.
Note: Up to 10 matrices from 1 matA to 0 matJ can be defined.
2. Enter the row dimension number and press E.
Cursor moves to the column dimension.
3. Enter the column dimension number and press E.
The matrix will be displayed with null values. (See below.)
* It is not required to press E when the dimension number is
2 digits.
Define
dimensions
Select a matrix
123
Chapter 8: Matrix Features
1. Press appropriate number keys to enter numbers at the 1st
row and 1st column.
The number is displayed at the bottom of the screen.
2. Press E.
The cursor moves to the 1st row, 2nd column.
3. Sequentially input the element data.
4. Press # after completion of data input.
Editing keys and functions
; ' Move the cursor within the current row or scroll horizontally.
{ } Move the cursor within the current column or scroll vertically.
On the top row, { moves the cursor to the dimensions field.
E ENTER the number in the cursor position and move the cursor to
the next position.
C Clear the value of bottom line (input field).
# Store all the elements of the matrix and returns to the calculation
screen.
Enter elements
in the matrix
124
Chapter 8: Matrix Features
3. Normal Matrix Operations
Many calculations can be made between a matrix and a real number or between
matrices.
Examples of each calculation are as follows:
To add or subtract matrices, the dimensions must be the same.
Example
1. Press # C.
2. Press @ m A
1 + @ m
A 2
3. Press E.
To multiply two matrices, the column dimension of the first matrix
must match the row dimension of the second matrix.
Example
1. Press # C.
2. Press @ m A
1 | @ m
A 2
3. Press E.
To obtain the square of a matirx:
Example
1. Press # C.
2. Press @ m A
1 y
3. Press E.
Matrix + Matrix
Matrix Matrix
Matrix
× Matrix
Square of
Matrix
125
Chapter 8: Matrix Features
4. Special Matrix Operations
This calculator has three Matrix calculation menus: OPE, MATH and [ ].
Examples of each calculation are as follows:
Calculations using OPE menus
01 dim( dim(
matrix name
)
Returns the dimensions of the specified matrix.
Example
Check the dimensions of mat A.
•Newly define or change the
dimensions to 2
× 3 for
Mat C.
02 fill( fill(
value, matrix name
)
Fills each element with a
specified value.
Example
Enter the value 5 into all the
empty elements of matrix C.
126
Chapter 8: Matrix Features
03 cumul cumul
matrix name
Returns the cumulative matrix.
Example
Obtain the cumulative sum of mat A.
cumulative sum of a
ij
=
a
i1
+ a
i2
+ ...... + a
ij
04 augment( augment(
matrix name
,
matrix
name
)
Appends the second matrix to
the first matrix as new columns. The first and second matrices
must have the same number of rows.
Example
Create a new matrix with matrix A augmented by matrix B.
05 identity identity
dimension value
Returns the identity matrix with specified value of rows and
columns.
Example
Create the identity matrix of
3 rows
× 3 columns.
06 rnd_mat( rnd_mat(
number of row
,
number of column
)
Returns a random matrix with specified values of rows and
columns.
Example
Create a matrix of 2 rows
× 3
columns with generated
random values.
(when TAB = 2 and FSE =
“FIX” at SETUP menu)
127
Chapter 8: Matrix Features
07 row_swap( row_swap(
matrix name
,
row number
,
row number
)
Returns the matrix with specified rows swapped.
Example
•Swap the 2nd and 3rd rows in
the matrix E.
e
2j
= e
3j
, e
3j
= e
2j
08 row_plus( row_plus(
matrix name
,
row number
,
row number
)
Adds the first specified row data to the second specified row data.
Example
Add the 2nd row data to the
first row of matrix E.
e
1j
= e
1j
+ e
2j
09 row_mult( row_mult(
multiplied number
,
matrix name
,
row number
)
Returns the scalar multiplication of elements in a specified row.
Example
•3
× each element of 1st row of
mat E
e
1j
= 3 × e
1j
10 row_m.p.( row_m.p.(
multiplied number, matrix name
,
row number
,
row
number
)
Returns the scalar multiplication of elements in a specified row
and adds result to elements in another specified row.
Example
•2
× each element of 3rd row
and add the result to each
element of the 1st row.
e
1j
= e
1j
+ 2 × e
2j
128
Chapter 8: Matrix Features
11 matlist( Creates lists with elements from each column in the matrix.
If dimensions of columns is greater than the number of lists
specified, extra columns are ignored. Also, if it is less than the
number of lists specified, extra lists are ignored.
matlist(
matrix name, list name 1, ..., list name n
)
Example
Make List 1 and List 2 by
using the 1st and 2nd
columns of matrix E,
respectively.
matlist(
matrix name, column number, list name
)
Example
Make List 3 by using the 3rd
column of matrix E.
12 listmat( listmat(
list 1
,
.... list n, matrix name
)
Creates a matrix using specified lists. This function is the same as
listmat( in the List OPE menu.
Note: The list items must be prepared prior to executing this function.
Example
Create columns of matrix D by
using list items in L1 and L2.
129
Chapter 8: Matrix Features
Calculations using MATH menus
1 det det
matrix name
Returns the determinant of a square matrix.
The determinant can only be applied to a matrix which has the
same row and column dimensions.
Example
Give the determinant of matrix
A.
2 trans trans
matrix name
Returns the matrix with the columns transposed to rows and the
rows transposed to columns.
Example
•Transpose rows and columns
of matrix B.
3 rowEF rowEF
matrix name
Returns the row Echelon Form of the specified matrix. The
number of columns must be greater than or equal to the number
of rows.
Example
Give the row-echelon form of
matrix B.
4 rrowEF rrowEF
matrix name
Returns the reduced row Echelon Form of the specified matrix.
The number of columns must be greater than or equal to the
number of rows.
Example
Give the reduced row-echelon
form of matrix B.
130
Chapter 8: Matrix Features
Use of [ ] menus
Using [ ] menus, you can manually enter a matrix on the calculation screen.
1. Press @ m E 1 ( [ ) at the beginning of the
matrix.
2. Press @ m 1 ( [ ) to indicate the beginning of the
first row.
Once you enter the manual matrix entry mode, you can
directly enter “or” by selecting 1 or 2 .
3. Enter a number or expression for each element. Separate
each element with commas.
4. Press @ m 2
( ] ) to indicate the end of the
first row.
5. Repeat above steps 2 to 4 to enter all the rows.
6. Press @ m 2 ( ] ) to indicate the end of the
matrix.
7. Press E.
The matrix will be displayed.
To use a matrix in an expression, you can do any of the follow-
ings:
Select a matrix from the m NAME menu.
Enter the matrix directly using the [ ] function menus.
Using a Matrix in
an expression
131
Chapter 9
List Features
By analyzing years of data, we found that it takes the driver of a car
approximately 0.75 seconds to react to a situation before actually applying the
brakes. Once the brake pedal is depressed, it takes additional time for the car to
come to a complete stop. Here is the equation used to compute total stopping
distance on dry, level concrete:
The reaction time distance (in feet) = 1.1 times the speed (in miles per hour);
The braking distance = 0.06 times the speed squared;
y = (1.1
× v) + (0.06 × v
2
),
where y represents the total stopping distance
(in feet), and v represents the speed (miles/
hour)
Calculate the total stopping distances at the
speeds of 30, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80 miles per hour.
CONCEPT
1. You can calculate all answers individually, but if you use list,
you can obtain the results with one calculation.
PROCEDURE
List features can be used in both Advanced and Basic mode. In this chapter, all the
procedures are based on the Advanced mode. In the Basic mode, press @ l
and select A NAME to access L1 to L6.
1. Try it!
2. Press # C to enter the calculation screen.
3. Press @ { 30
, 40 , 50 ,
60 , 70 , 80
@ }
The calculator displays the
set of data.
Enter each
speed value in
the list
132
Chapter 9: List Features
Note: •You can also perform the
above calculation using the
direct list input method (using
braces).
1.1 | {30, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80} + 0.06 | {30, 40,
50, 60, 70, 80} y and press E.
In the Basic mode, you can
access L1 to L6 from A
NAME and “{ }” (braces) from
E {} in the LIST menu.
Car speed Stopping distance
30 miles/hour 87 feet
40 miles/hour 140 feet
50 miles/hour 205 feet
60 miles/hour 282 feet
70 miles/hour 371 feet
80 miles/hour 472 feet
4. Press R @ 1.
5. Press E to store the list
in L1.
6. Press 1.1 | @
1 + 0.06 |
@ 1 y
7. Press E.
8. List {87, 140, 205, 282, 371,
472} will appear.
So the solutions are:
Store the list in
L1
Enter the
equation using
L1
133
Chapter 9: List Features
2. Creating a list
A list is a series of values enclosed by braces, and is treated as a single value in
calculations or an equations.
The calculator has 6 storage areas for lists from L1 to L6.
You can edit or access lists by pressing @ 1 to 6 (numeric keys from 1
to 6).
Using @ l (L_DATA) menus, you can store up to 10 sets (L_DATA 0 to
L_DATA 9) of lists (L1 to L6) in a memory and recall any of the stored sets as re-
quired.
1. Press # C to enter the calculation screen.
2. Press @ { 1 ,
3 , 2 , 9 @
}
3. Press R @ 1.
4. Press E to store the list
in L1.
5. Press @ { 5 ,
4 , 6 , 3 @
} R @ 2
E for L2.
Tips: To view a specific list, press
@ 1 to 6, then E at the calculation screen.
3. Normal List Operations
Lists can contain real and complex numbers.
Lists can be used as values (or variables) in calculations or equations.
Calculations between lists are also possible. (Both lists must contain the same
number of elements.)
The following examples use the L1 and L2 values stored in the previous section.
Store a series
of data 1, 3, 2,
and 9 in the list
L1, and 5, 4, 6, 3
in L2
134
Chapter 9: List Features
1. Press 10 | @
1 R @ 3
E.
2. Press s @ 3
E. “... shows that
results extend beyond the
display to the right. Use
;, ' to scroll left or
right, respectively.
3. Press @ 1 +
@ 2 E.
4. Press _ 3 R @
1 ( 3 ) A
/ @ 1 E.
5. Press 7 R @ 1
( 5 ) A /
@ 1 E.
Note: Separated by a colon (:), two or
more commands can be
entered in one line.
6. Press @ + @
2 E.
Calculate 10
×
L1 and store the
results in L3
Calculate the
sine of L3
Calculate
L1 + L2
Change the 3rd
element of L1
to –3
Append the new
value 7 to L1 as
the 5th element
Calculate the
root of L2
135
Chapter 9: List Features
4. Special List Operations
This calculator has three list calculation menus: OPE, MATH and L_DATA.
* In the Basic mode, L1 to L6 (list names) can be accessed from the LIST menu.
Calculations using the OPE menu functions
1 sortA( sortA(
list name
)
Sorts lists in ascending order.
Example
Store list {2, 7, 4} in L1, and
sort L1 in ascending order.
2 sortD( sortD(
list name
)
Sorts lists in descending order.
Example
Sort the above list L1 in
descending order.
Note: sortA(
list name 1, subordinate list name 1
,...)
If two or more lists are entered separated by commas, a sort is
performed on the first list as a key, and the following lists are
sorted in the order corresponding to the elements in first list (key
list).
Example
Store lists {2, 7, 4} and {
-3, -4,
-1} in L1 and L2 respectively,
and sort L1 and L2 in ascend-
ing order using list L1 as a
key list.
136
Chapter 9: List Features
3 dim( dim(
list
)
Returns the number of items
(dimension) in the list.
Example
Display the dimension of list
L1.
natural number dim(
list name
)
Set the number of items (dimension) of specified list to the
specified number.
Example
Set the dimension of list L6 to
4.
All the elements are initially 0.
This operation overwrites the
existing list dimensions.
The existing values within the new dimensions remain as they
are.
4 fill( fill(
value
,
list
)
Enter the specified value for all the items in the specified list.
* The dimension of the list must be set beforehand.
Example
Set the dimension of list L6 to
4 and substitute 5 for all the
items of list L6.
137
Chapter 9: List Features
5 seq( seq(
equation
,
start value
,
end value[
,
increments]
) target list
name
Makes a list using the specified equation, range (start value and
end value) and increments.
Example
Fill the list using the equation
y = x
2
8, where x increases
from -4 to 4 by increments of
2.
* If increment is omitted, the
default value 1 is used.
6 cumul cumul
list
Sequentially cumulates each item in the list (for Advanced mode
only).
l
i
= l
1
+ l
2
+ ... + l
i
, where l
i
is the i-th item of the list.
Example
Set the list L1 to {4, 2, 7}, and
obtain the cumulated list L1.
Cumulate the above result.
7 df_list df_list
list
Returns a new list using the difference between adjacent items in
the list.
l
i
= l
i+1
– l
i
, where l
i
is the i-th item of the list.
Example
Set the list L1 to {4, 2, 7}, and
calculate the difference
between adjacent items.
138
Chapter 9: List Features
8 augment( augment(
list 1
,
list 2
)
Returns a list appending the specified lists.
Example
Obtain the list appending L1
({4, 2, 7}) and L2 ({
-1, -3, -4}).
9 listmat( listmat(
list 1, ..., list n, matrix name
)
Makes a matrix using the specified list as column data, stored
under the specified matrix name (for Advanced mode only).
Example
Make a matrix mat A using list
L1 as the first row and list L2
as the second row.
* The dimensions of the two
lists must be the same.
* Complex numbers cannot be used with this function.
* This function is the same as listmat of the OPE menu in the
MATRIX function.
0 matlist( matlist(
matrix name
,
list name 1
,
..., list name n
)
matlist(
matrix name
,
column number
,
list name
)
Makes lists from the matrix (for Advanced mode only).
This function is the same as “matlist” of the OPE menu in the
MATRIX function. See page 128 for details.
139
Chapter 9: List Features
Calculations using MATH Menus
During the following explanations, the values of lists, L1 and L2 will be assumed to be:
L1 = {2, 8, -4}
L2 = {-3, -4, -1}
1 min( min(
list
)
Returns the minimum value in the list.
Example
Calculate the minimum value
of the list L1.
2 max( max(
list
)
Returns the maximum value in
the list.
Example
Calculate the maximum value of the specified list L2.
Note: min(
list 1, list 2
)
max(
list 1, list 2
)
If two lists are specified in
parenthesis separated by a
comma, then a list consisting of
minimum (or maximum) values
is returned.
3 mean( mean(
list [, frequency list]
)
Returns the mean value of items in the specified list.
Example
Calculate the mean value of
list L1.
140
Chapter 9: List Features
4 median( median(
list [, frequency list]
)
Returns the median value of items in the specified list.
Example
Calculate the median value of
the list L2.
5 sum( sum(
list
[
,
start number, end number]
)
Returns the sum of items in the specified list.
Example
Calculated the sum of the list
items of L1.
*You can specify the range of
items in the list to sum.
sum(L1,1,2) means sum
the 1st to 2nd items of the list L1.
sum(L1,2) means sum all items from the second to the last
of the list L1.
6 prod( prod(
list
[
,
start number
,
end number]
)
Returns the multiplication of items in the specified list (for
Advanced mode only).
Example
Calculate the multiplication of
items in the list L1.
*You can specify the range of
items in the list to multiply.
prod(L1,1,2) means
multiply the 1st to 2nd items of the list L1.
prod(L1,2) means multiplication of all items from the
second to the last of the list L1.
141
Chapter 9: List Features
7 stdDv( stdDv(
list [, frequency list]
)
Returns the standard deviation of the specified list items.
Example
Calculate the standard
deviation using the list items
of list L2.
8 varian( varian(
list [, frequency list]
)
Returns the variance of the specified list items.
Example
Calculate the variance using
the list items of list L2.
Standard deviation and variance
Standard deviation: s =
Variance =
where n = number of list items
l
k = list item value
m = mean value of the list
Variance
n
1
(l
k
m)
2
k = 1
n
5. Drawing multiple graphs using the list function
Using list items as coordinates, you can simultaneously draw multiple graphs.
1. Press Y.
2. Enter the equation;
Y1 = {3, -2}x
2
+ {5, 3}x + {2, 4}
142
Chapter 9: List Features
3. Press G.
Two graphs are drawn as
shown on the right.
In this case, the first one
represents the equation y =
3x
2
+ 5x + 2 and the second y = -2x
2
+ 3x + 4.
You can also use L1 to L6 to enter the equation;
1. Set the lists L1 to L3 as
follows;
{3,
-2} L1,
{5, 3} L2,
{2, 4} L3, and then
2. Enter the equation as follows.
Y1 = L1x
2
+ L2x + L3
6. Using L_DATA functions
The calculator can store up to 10 list groups in memory (L_DATA 0 to L_DATA 9). You
may store or recall any one of these list groups. Each list group can contain up to 6
lists.
1 StoLD StoLD
natural number (0-9)
Stores the current group of lists (L1 to L6) in L_DATA 0 to 9.
Example
1. Press @ l and
select C 1.
2. Enter the preferred number
from 0 to 9 and press E.
“Done” will appear and the
current lists will be stored in L_DATA #.
143
Chapter 9: List Features
2 RclLD RclLD
natural number (0-9)
Recall the stored group of lists for use.
Any current list data (not stored in L_DATA) is overwritten.
Example
1. Press @ l and
select C 2.
2. Enter the number to recall
and press E.
“Done” will appear and the
current lists will be overwritten by the recalled list group.
7. Using List Table to Enter or Edit Lists
You can use List Table in the STAT menu to easily access the contents of the lists.
Though the STAT menu was originally designed for Statistics function calculations, the
List Table is very useful for entering or editing list items.
How to enter the list
1. Press S A E.
The list table will appear.
The first column indicates
the order number of each
list, and the 2nd column
corresponds to the list L1, the 3rd to the L2, and so on.
2. Move the cursor to the target cell and enter the appropriate
value.
The value will appear on the bottom line.
3. Press E.
The value will enter the cell and the cursor move down to the
next cell.
* “--------” indicates the end of the list. When you enter the value,
“--------” goes down to the next cell.
144
Chapter 9: List Features
How to edit the list
1. Press S and select A EDIT, then press E.
2. Use the cursor keys to move the cursor to the target cell.
3. Enter the new value and press E.
The new value will be stored in the target cell.
* The display on the bottom line relates to the cell where the
cursor pointer is located.
Though any number can be entered in a cell, the bottom line of
the screen can display up to a maximum of 10 digits excluding
exponents, and the cell can display up to a maximum of 8 digits
including exponents.
145
Chapter 10
Statistics & Regression
Calculations
The following table shows the access counts (per hour) of a certain web site
from Sunday midnight to Monday midnight.
Let’s input these data into the calculator (List
function) and plot a histogram.
1. Press S.
The Stat menu will appear.
Hours
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
Sunday
98 72 55 3 6 24 15 30 59 72 55 43 21 10 150 151 135 108 204 253 232 251 75 30
Monday
32 8 12 2 4 19 32 72 95 91 123 201 184 108 95 72 45 38 75 111 153 90 84 35
Note: The explanation of this chapter is based on the Advanced
Keyboard.
The following statistical and regression features are available:
Statistical calculations such as means and standard deviations
•Graphing statistical data
Plotting regression curves
Statistical tests
Estimation
Obtaining coefficients from regressions
Distribution functions
1. Try it!
Opening the list
table to enter
data
146
Chapter 10: Statistics & Regression Calculations
2. Select A EDIT and press E.
The List table will appear. Initially, all elements are blank and
the cursor pointer is located at L1-1 (top left).
3. Input 1 for hour.
4. 1 will be displayed at the
bottom line of the display.
5. Press E to input the
index value.
6. Continue the procedure to input 2 to 24.
7. Press ' to move the
cursor to the top line of L2.
8. Input 98 for hour 01.
98 will be displayed at the
bottom line of the display.
9. Press E to input the data.
98 will appear in position L2-1 and the cursor will move to the
second row.
10
. Input 72 for hour 02 and press E. Continue the procedure
to the end of the data.
11
. Press ' to move the
cursor to the top line of L3.
12
. Input 32 for hour 01 and
press E.
13
. Continue the procedure to
the end of the data.
1. Press ;, ', {, or } to move the cursor
pointer to the target cell.
2. Input the correct number and press E.
Now we can plot the data to make histograms, broken line graphs
and other statistical graphs.
1. Press [.
2. Select A PLOT1 and press E.
The following screen will appear.
Entering hours
(index value)
Entering the
data for Sunday
Entering the
data for Monday
If you enter the
wrong data
Graphing the
statistical data
(Histogram)
147
Chapter 10: Statistics & Regression Calculations
3. The first line shows if the
graph drawing is on or off.
Initially, the graph drawing is
off. With the cursor pointer at
the “on” position, press
E to set the graph
drawing on.
4. Press } to move the cursor to the next line (DATA).
5. Select X for 1-variable plotting and press E.
Determining ListX and Freq Frequency relates to the number of
times access occurred (L2) at the ListX stage. You can refer that
the Access of ListX (L1) hour occurred Freq (L2) number of times.
6. Press } to move the cursor to the next line (ListX).
7. The default list name for ListX is L1. If another list name is set,
press @ 1 to enter L1.
8. L1 is set to be used for x-axis items.
9. Press } to move the
cursor to the next line (Freq).
10
. Press @ 2 to enter
L2.
11
. Press } to move the cursor to the next line (GRAPH).
12
. The graph format defaults to histogram, so if that is what is
required, this does not need to be changed.
13
. Press Z, and then
select A ZOOM.
14
. Press ' to move the
cursor right and then press
} several times.
9 Stat will appear.
Setting the
graph drawing
“on”
Selecting
whether 1-
variable plotting
or 2-variable
plotting
Select the list
number used
for graphing
Setting the
frequency
Selecting the
graph
Making a graph
148
Chapter 10: Statistics & Regression Calculations
15
. Select 9 Stat and press E.
You can directly press 9 at step 13 to select 9 Stat.
The histogram will appear on the display.
When you draw the graph using the automatic statistics zoom
function (9 Stat), the division number is automatically set to
Xmax
Xmin
Xscl
(default value: 10). If you wish to show the graph
hour by hour, change the value in the W menu.
1. Press W.
Window (Rect) setting menu
will appear.
2. Enter the values as shown in
the diagram to the right.
Ymax is determined by the maximum access number (253 at
20:00 on Sunday).
3. Press G.
You can compare up to 3
statistical data by setting
PLOT2/PLOT3 to on.
1. Press [ A E and move the cursor to GRAPH.
2. Press [ again.
3. Press B and 1
(broken line with circle dots).
4. Press G.
The histogram is now
changed to a broken line graph.
5. Press @ q to clear the screen.
6. Press [ and select B PLOT2.
7. Set as follows.
PLOT: on, DATA: X, ListX: L1, and Freq: L3.
Set the WINDOW
settings
Set the statistical
plotting of PLOT1
(Sunday data) to
a broken line
Compare the
access rates on
Sunday and
Monday
149
Chapter 10: Statistics & Regression Calculations
8. Move the cursor to GRAPH
and press [.
9. Press B 2 (broken
line with cross points).
10
. Press G.
Now you can compare the
difference in web site access
counts between Sunday and Monday.
Press @ q.
2. Statistics Features
1. STAT menus
Press the S key to access the statistical calculation menus. The menus are as
follows:
A EDIT Provides the entry or edit mode and displays a list table.
B OPE Calculation menu for operations such as ascending or descend-
ing sort.
C CALC Obtains statistical values.
D REG Calculates regression curves.
E TEST Statistical hypothesis tests
F DISTRI Distribution menu items
Use a list table to enter the statistical data (press S to
access). Up to 999 elements can be used for each list, though the
amount of data able to be entered will vary according to the
memory usage.
Use the CALC menu under the STAT menu to obtain statistic
values.
Press S C to access the CALC menu.
Data Entry
Calculating
statistic values
(CALC menu)
150
Chapter 10: Statistics & Regression Calculations
2. Statistical evaluations available under the C CALC menu
1_Stats 1-variable (x) statistical a calculations
x
_
Mean of sample (x)
sx Standard deviation of sample (x)
sx =
Σx
2
nx
2
n 1
σxPopulation standard deviation of sample (x)
σx =
Σx
2
nx
2
n
Σx Sum of sample (x)
Σx
2
Sum of squares of sample (x)
n Sample number
xmin Smallest value of sample (x)
Q1 First quartile of sample (x)
Med Median of sample (x)
Q3 Third quartile of sample (x)
xmax Largest value of sample (x)
2_Stats 2-variable (x, y) statistical calculations
The following values are added to the 1-variable statistic calcula-
tions
y
_
Mean of sample (y)
sy Standard deviation of sample (y)
σyPopulation standard deviation of sample (y)
Σy Sum of sample (y)
Σy
2
Sum of squares of sample (y)
Σxy Sum of product of sample (x, y)
ymin Smallest value of sample (y)
ymax Largest value of sample (y)
151
Chapter 10: Statistics & Regression Calculations
The web site access counts example on page 145 will be used again to demonstrate
the calculation of statistical values.
* If you did not previously enter the above values in the list table, press S and
select A EDIT to display the list entry mode and enter the values.
Calculating one-variable statistics using web site access counts for Sunday (L2) and
Monday (L3).
1. Press # C and S to display the statistics menu.
2. Press C and then 1.
1_Stats will be displayed on the top line of the screen followed
by the cursor.
3. Press @ 2 to enter
L2 and press E.
All the statistical values will
be displayed on the screen.
4. Press } or { to scroll the screen.
5. Press S to display the statistics menu.
6. Press C and then 1.
1_Stats will be displayed on the bottom line of the screen
followed by the cursor.
7. Press @ 3 to enter
L3 and press E.
Hours
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
Sunday
98 72 55 3 6 24 15 30 59 72 55 43 21 10 150 151 135 108 204 253 232 251 75 30
Monday
32 8 12 2 4 19 32 72 95 91 123 201 184 108 95 72 45 38 75 111 153 90 84 35
Statistical
calculations
using the
Sunday data (L2)
Statistical
calculations
using the
Monday data (L3)
152
Chapter 10: Statistics & Regression Calculations
Calculating the previous two-variable statistical values can be
performed in a single operation. Use a “ , ” (comma) to separate
the two variables.
1. Press # C and
S to display the statis-
tics menu.
2. Press C and then
2.
2_Stats will be displayed on the top line of the screen followed
by the cursor.
3. Press @ 2 , @ 3 to enter L2 and L3,
and press E.
All the statistical values will
be displayed on the screen.
4. Press } or { to
scroll the screen.
ANOVA( The ANOVA( feature performs an analysis of variance to compare
up to six population means.
1. Press # C and S to display the statistics menu.
2. Press C and then 3.
ANOVA(_ will display on the top line of the screen.
3. Press @ 2 ,
@ 3 ).
4. Press E.
The answer will appear on
the screen.
Each character represents the following variables.
F The F statistic for the analysis
p The p value for the analysis
df Degrees of freedom
SS Sum of squares
MS Mean Square
sxp Pooled standard deviation
153
Chapter 10: Statistics & Regression Calculations
3. Graphing the statistical data
Press [ to access the statistical graphing mode.
The calculator can plot statistical data on up to 3 types of graph
(PLOT1 to PLOT3) to check the state of distribution.
The graph types can be selected from histogram, broken line plot,
normal probability plot, normal distribution plot, box plot, modified
box plot, pie chart, scatter diagram and XY line. Broken line plot,
normal probability plot, modified box plot, scatter diagram and XY
line can use 3 different types of points — circle, cross, and
square.
Statistical graph types overview (chart)
PLOT1
PLOT2
PLOT3
POINT:
°
POINT: +
POINT:
Histogram
Broken line plot
Normal probability plot
Normal distribution plot
Box plot
Modified box plot
Pie chart
Scatter diagram
XY line
1. Graph Types
A bar graph of sample (x)
The width of the bars is set by the Xscl*.
The Y-axis shows the frequency.
* The Xscl can be changed to
between 1 and 64. Use the
Window Setting Menu to
change the Xscl. (See page
57.)
Histogram
(HIST)
154
Chapter 10: Statistics & Regression Calculations
A broken line graph for the frequency distribution of sample (x)
Three types of points can be selected from circle, cross and
square.
The correlation of points between histogram and broken line plot
are shown on the right. (The broken line is displayed by connect-
ing the upper left points of the bars of the histogram, as the upper
left point of each bar represents
each class value in the histo-
gram.)
The calculator can draw both a
histogram and a broken line plot
at the same time.
Plots the variance of the
standardized normal distribution
with the statistical data (x) on
the X axis or Y axis.
If the points plot almost linearly,
it indicates that the data is of
normal distribution.
The distance between the dots is set by the Xscl.
The Xscl can be changed between 1 and 64. Use the Window
Setting Menu to change the figure. (See page 57)
•You cannot set the frequency in the Normal probability plot. The
statistical data must be created using only one list without
splitting into the data and frequency.
A normal distribution curve of sample(x)
The x-axis is in the range of
Xmin to Xmax.
Broken line plot
(B.L.)
Normal
probability plot
(N.P.)
Normal
distribution plot
(N.D.)
155
Chapter 10: Statistics & Regression Calculations
A box plot graph of sample (x)
A. The minimum value (xmin) of
the sample (x)
B. The first quartile (Q1)
C. Median (Med) of the sample
(x)
D. The third quartile (Q3)
E. The maximum value (xmax) of the sample (x)
A modified box plot graph of sample (x)
A. The minimum value (xmin) of
the sample (x)
B. The tip of extension which is
defined by (Q3
Q1) x 1.5
C. The first quartile (Q1)
D. Median (Med) of the sample (x)
E. The third quartile (Q3)
F. The tip of extension which is defined by (Q3 Q1) x 1.5
G. The maximum value (xmax) of the sample (x)
Statistical data on the outside of the extension are indicated by
points, selectable from circle, cross, or square.
The length of the extension from the box is determined by Q1
and Q3.
A EB C D
A B C D E F G
Box plot
(Box)
Modified box
plot
(MBox)
156
Chapter 10: Statistics & Regression Calculations
Pie graph of sample (x)
Maximum number of division
is 8.
Calculation range: 0 x < 10
100
Data can be displayed in two
modes:
•Value display: 8 digits
•Percentage display: Fixed decimal (2 digits decimal)
* Pie graphs are drawn in the same order as on the specifying
list.
* Pie graphs cannot be displayed simultaneously with other
graphs and X/Y axis, though lines or dots can be drawn. The
coordinates of the free-moving cursor depend on the Window
settings.
The values are stored in variables A to H.
As all the displayed values are rounded down in the percentage
display mode, the total percentage may not be 100.
A two-dimensional plot graph using two samples (x, y)
Two sets of statistical data are required for the scatter diagram.
Three types of points are
selectable from circle, cross
and square.
•Two statistical data lists can
be set to either x- or y-axis
according to your requirements.
Displays a graph that con-
nects each point of the scatter
diagram.
Each point is connected in the
sequence (rows) of the
statistical data.
Pie chart
(PIE)
Scatter diagram
(S.D.)
XY Line
(XYLINE)
157
Chapter 10: Statistics & Regression Calculations
2. Specifying statistical graph and graph functions
Up to three graphs can be plotted per sample data.
1. Press [.
2. Select from A PLOT1, B PLOT2 or C PLOT3 and press E
to set the statistical graphing specifications.
Press @ q before step #3.
•You may just press A to C to select.
•You can overlap 3 plotting graphs (from PLOT1 to PLOT3) on a
single screen. Choose on or off at the top line to determine
whether each graph is displayed or not.
3. Press [ D (D Limit) to specify the graphing range.
The D Limit menu is used to set the upper and lower limit
lines of sample (x) of the statistical graph.
4. Press 1 (1 SET).
5. Enter the appropriate value for Lower limit and press E.
6. Enter the appropriate value for Upper limit and press E.
7. Press [ D (D Limit) and press 2 (2 LimON)
E to display a line that indicates the mean value of
sample (x), as well as the upper and lower limit lines.
8. Press [ D 3 (3 LimOFF) and E not to
display the lines.
Upper and lower limit values are displayed using short broken
lines.
The default value of the upper/lower limit is 1.
* The mean value line is indicated by a long broken line.
3. Statistical plotting on/off function
•You can set the statistical plotting of PLOT 1 to 3 at once.
1. Press [.
2. Press E.
Limit settings
(x value)
Displaying the
upper and lower
limit lines
Displaying the
mean value line
of sample (x)
Specifying type
of statistics
graphing
158
Chapter 10: Statistics & Regression Calculations
3. To set the all plotting ON: Press 1 (1 PlotON).
•To set the all plotting OFF: Press 2 (2 PlotOFF).
*You can control the plotting of PLOT1 to PLOT3 separately
by pressing 1 ~ 3 after PlotON (or PlotOFF).
4. Press E to set.
4. Trace function of statistical graphs
The trace feature is available in statistical graphing and can be used to trace the
curves of graphs with the cursor.
1. Press U.
2. Use ; or ' to move the cursor pointer to trace the
graph curve.
How tracing is done
After pressing U, the
cursor pointer will appear on
the top left corner of the first
bar.
If you press ; or ', the cursor pointer sequentially
jumps between top left corners of the bars.
•X and Y values are displayed at the bottom line of the screen.
Use { or } to change between graphs to trace.
After pressing U, the
cursor pointer will appear on
the Med value of sample (x).
If you press ; or ',
the cursor pointer sequentially
jumps among specific values, such as Q1, Q3, min, max.
The value of cursor pointer position is displayed at the bottom
line of the screen.
If you press ; or ', the cursor pointer sequentially
trace the chart. The cursor is displayed at the outside the graph,
and the selected chart is highlighted.
Tracing the
graph
Box plots and
modified box
plots
Histogram
Pie chart
159
Chapter 10: Statistics & Regression Calculations
4. Data list operations
Descending sort, ascending sort, changing the list order and deleting the lists can be
done in the Operation menu.
Press S B OPE to access the data list operations.
1 sortA( sortA(
list
)
Sorts the list in ascending order.
This function is the same as the sortA( menu item in List func-
tions.
See page 135 for details.
2 sortD( sortD(
list
)
Sorts the list in descending order.
This function is the same as the sortD( menu item in List func-
tions.
See page 135 for details.
3 SetList SetList
list name 1 [, list name 2 ...]
Changes the list order as specified.
Example
To change the order of lists in
order of L2, L3, L1.
Press E to execute.
Each list must be separated by
a “ , ” (comma).
If only a single list name is specified, the specified list moves to
the left end of the table.
After changing the list order, execute SetList with no argument.
The list names are redefined according to the changing order.
4 ClrList ClrList
list name 1 [, list name 2 ...]
Deletes all the data from the specified list(s).
Example
To delete the data of L1 and L2.
Press E to execute.
Each list must be separated by
a “ , ” (comma).
160
Chapter 10: Statistics & Regression Calculations
5. Regression Calculations
1. Press S D REG.
The Regression menu is displayed.
01 Med_Med Med_Med
(list name for x, list name for y [, frequency list] [,
equation name to store])
Finds the regression line using the median-median method.
(linear regression)
Formula: y = ax
+ b
Parameters: a, b
02 Rg_ax+b Rg_ax+b
(list name for x, list name for y [, frequency list] [,
equation name to store])
Finds the regression line. (linear regression)
Formula: y = ax + b
Parameters: a, b, r, r
2
03 Rg_a+bx Rg_a+bx
(list name for x, list name for y [, frequency list] [,
equation name to store])
Finds the regression line. (linear regression)
Formula: y = a + bx
Parameters: a, b, r, r
2
04 Rg_x
2
Rg_x
2
(list name for x, list name for y [, frequency list] [,
equation name to store])
Finds the regression line using the second degree polynomial.
(quadratic regression)
Formula: y = ax
2
+ bx + c
Parameters: a, b, c, R
2
05 Rg_x
3
Rg_x
3
(list name for x, list name for y [, frequency list] [,
equation name to store])
Finds the regression line using the third degree polynomial. (cubic
regression)
Formula: y = ax
3
+ bx
2
+ cx + d
Parameters: a, b, c, d, R
2
Accessing the
regression menu
161
Chapter 10: Statistics & Regression Calculations
06 Rg_x
4
Rg_x
4
(list name for x, list name for y [, frequency list] [,
equation name to store])
Finds the regression curve using the fourth degree polynomial.
(quadratic regression)
Formula: y = ax
4
+ bx
3
+ cx
2
+ dx + e
Parameters: a, b, c, d, e, R
2
07 Rg_ln Rg_ln
(list name for x, list name for y [, frequency list] [,
equation name to store])
Finds the regression curve using the natural logarithm. (natural
logarithm regression)
Formula: y = a
+ b ln x
Parameters: a, b, r, r
2
08 Rg_log Rg_log
(list name for x, list name for y [, frequency list] [,
equation name to store])
Finds the regression curve using the common logarithm. (com-
mon logarithm regression)
Formula: y = a + b log x
Parameters: a, b, r, r
2
09 Rg_ab
x
Rg_ab
x
(list name for x, list name for y [, frequency list] [,
equation name to store])
Finds the regression curve using the exponential function.
(exponential regression)
Formula: y = ab
x
Parameters: a, b, r, r
2
10 Rg_ae
bx
Rg_ae
bx
(list name for x, list name for y [, frequency list] [,
equation name to store])
Finds the regression curve using the Euler exponential function.
(Euler exponential regression)
Formula: y = ae^bx
Parameters: a, b, r, r
2
162
Chapter 10: Statistics & Regression Calculations
11 Rg_x
–1
Rg_x
–1
(list name for x, list name for y [, frequency list] [,
equation name to store])
Finds the regression curve using the reciprocal function. (recipro-
cal regression)
Formula: y = a + bx
-
1
Parameters: a, b, r, r
2
12 Rg_ax
b
Rg_ax
b
(list name for x, list name for y [, frequency list] [,
equation name to store])
Finds the regression curve using the power function. (power
regression)
Formula: y = ax
b
Parameters: a, b, r, r
2
13 Rg_logistic Rg_logistic
(list name for x, list name for y [, frequency list] [,
equation name to store])
Finds the regression curve using the logistic function. (logistic
regression)
Formula: y = c ÷ (1 + ae
-
bx
)
Parameters: a, b, c
14 Rg_sin Rg_sin
([iterations,] list name for x, list name for y [, fre-
quency list] [, period] [, equation name to store])
Finds the regression curve using the sine function.
The calculator will fit a sine curve for unequal and equal spacing.
Formula: y = a sin(bx
+ c) + d
Parameters: a, b, c, d
Note: The default iterations value is 3. The user may specify the value
up to 25. To raise the accuracy, set the iterations value to 25 and
enter 2π/b to the period, where b = result obtained from the
calculation beforehand.
163
Chapter 10: Statistics & Regression Calculations
15 x’
value or list
x’
Finds the estimated value of x for a given value of y by applying
the function determined by the regression.
Example
When the following is entered as statistical data:
x10 20304050
y20 406080100
Find estimated value of x given
y = 140.
1. Enter the above data into L1
(x) and L2 (y) and execute
Rg_ax+b (L1, L2).
2. Press # 140 S D 1 5 E.
16 y’
value or list
y’
Find the estimated value of y for a given value of x by applying
the function determined by the regression formula.
Example
Using above data, find the estimated value for y given x = 80, 100.
1. Press # @ { 80
, 100 @ }
S D 1 6
E.
15 x’ and 16 y’ will be valid
after executing a regression calculation excluding 2nd, 3rd, 4th,
degree polynomial, logistic, and sine regressions.
The following table shows the relationship between the time and
temperature of water, when heating a beaker filled with water.
Time (min) 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 10.5 11 11.5 12 12.5
Temperature
38.4 46.4 54.4 62.5 69.6 76.1 82.4 88.6 93.4 94.9 96.5 98.2 99.1 100
(°C)
Using the
regression
functions
164
Chapter 10: Statistics & Regression Calculations
1. Press S A E.
2. Enter the time into list 1 (L1).
3. Enter the temperature into list 2 (L2).
1. Press [ A E.
2. Press E to turn on the plotting.
3. Press } and ' to select XY of DATA menu and press
E.
Freq will change to ListY and set L2 to ListY.
1. Press } to move the cursor to GRAPH.
2. Press [ G and 2 (2 Scattr+) to set the graph
type to scatter and point type to +”.
3. Press Z A 9 (9 Stat) to plot the scatter diagram
for this data.
Selecting A 9 in the ZOOM mode allows for quick
graphing in an optimum range since window setting values of
the graph plotting screen are automatically set using the list
data.
1. Press # C S D 0 4 (04 Rg_x
2
).
2. Press ( @ 1 , @ 2 , @
z A E A 1 ).
If you enter Y1 as the last variable, the obtained formula will
automatically be set to the formula Y1.
3. Press E.
The regression formula and parameters will be displayed on
the screen.
4. Press G.
The calculator will draw the scatter diagram using the deter-
mined parameter values.
5. If there is a large difference between the regression curve and
plotted dots, change the regression curve and repeat the
above procedures.
Enter a data in a
list table
Plotting the data
Selecting the
graph type
Drawing a
regression
curve using
quadratic
regression
165
Chapter 10: Statistics & Regression Calculations
There are residuals between regression curves and actual
values.
The residual list stores these residuals automatically.
The resid list can be found in B REGEQN of the STAT VARS
menu (@ z H E B 0 ).
Use the following key operation to recall the residual list from
the calculation screen.
# C @ z H E B 0
Press E to display the residual list on-screen.
•To show the residual list in the form of a graph, first store as a
list, then follow the graphing operation.
* resid cannot be graphed when specified independently.
6. Statistical Hypothesis Testing
The calculator performs hypothesis tests on statistical data.
1. Press S E (E TEST).
The statistics test menu will appear.
2. There are 17 options in the statistics test menu. Press '
to navigate between pages,
and press { or } to
scroll the window.
3. Press the appropriate
number to access a specific
test.
The statistics test window will appear.
4. Input appropriate information in the test window.
There are two types of input, from a statistics data list or
inputting numerical values.
Some tests may not allow for inputting from the statistics
data lists.
Start a statisti-
cal test
About the
residual list
166
Chapter 10: Statistics & Regression Calculations
16 InputList and 17 InputStats specify the above input
methods.
16 InputList: Sets the input mode to the statistic data list
method
17 InputStats: Sets the input mode to the value input mode
For example, press S E 1 6 E to set to
the list input mode.
5. Press @ h to execute the hypothesis test.
Note: Either list input or parameter input may be used for tests other
than 01 χ
2
test, 05 TtestLinreg, 10 Ztest1prop, 11Ztest2prop,
14 Zint1prop and 15 Zint2prop.
•To clear the contents entered in Freq, move the cursor to the
list name then press D E.
01 χ
2
test Uses the sample data from a two-dimensional table represented
by a matrix.
Example
If mat A = 3 2 5 4
6 1 3 8
2 3 5 1
execute the χ
2
test and store the obtaining results in mat B.
1. Press S E 0 1.
2. Enter mat A as the Observed Matrix, and mat B as the
Expected Matrix.
Press @ m A
1 E @ m
A 2.
3. Press @ h to
execute the χ
2
test.
The result is entered in mat
B.
χ
2
: χ-squared statistic for the
test
p: p value for the test
df: degrees of freedom
167
Chapter 10: Statistics & Regression Calculations
02 Ftest2samp Two samples data are tested for equality of standard deviation σ
1
and σ
2
.
Example
Test when population standard deviation σ
1
< σ
2
,
n
1
= 20,
standard deviation sx
1
= 5.6,
n
2
= 50, and
standard deviation sx
2
= 6.2
1. Press # S E 1 7 E.
2. Press S E 0 2.
The parameter input screen
will appear.
3. Press ' E } to
select σ
1
< σ
2
.
4. Enter the values into the
parameter fields.
5.6 E 20 E 6.2 E 50 E.
5. Press @ h to
execute the test.
F: Statistics
p: Probability
03 Ttest1samp Tests the hypothesis of population mean µ.
Example
Test the population mean µ
0
= 65 with the sample data of
{65.6, 62.8, 66.0, 64.5, 65.1, 65.3, 63.8, 64.2, 63.5, 64.4},
from a given population
(alternate hypothesis of µ < µ
0
)
1. Enter the above statistical data into L1.
Press S E 1 6 E to set the list input
mode.
2. Press S E 0 3.
The parameter input screen will appear.
Set the input
method to value
input mode
168
Chapter 10: Statistics & Regression Calculations
3. Press ' E } to
select µ < µ
0
and press
E.
4. Move the cursor pointer to µ
0
and input 65 and press
E.
5. Set the List to L1 and press E.
6. Press @ h.
Answers are displayed on
the screen, where t is the t
statistic for the test, p is the
p value for the test and sx
indicates sample standard
deviation.
If there is no weight list, the Freq field can remain empty.
04 Ttest2samp Tests two sample means, µ
1
and µ
2
.
Example
Test the following two samples;
List 1 {2.37, 2.51, 2.43, 2.28, 2.46, 2.55, 2.49}
List 2 {2.63, 2.71, 2.56, 2.61, 2.55, 2.68, 2.42, 2.48, 2.51, 2.65}
1. Enter the above data into lists L1 and L2, respectively.
2. Press S E 0
4.
The parameter input screen
will appear.
3. Enter the appropriate value
into each field.
If no Freq specification data
is input, an initial Freq value
of 1 is used.
*Pooled is prediction for
unknown σ
1
, σ
2
.
Select “No” if σ
1
, σ
2
, are subjectively unequal.
Select “Yes” if σ
1
, σ
2
, are equal.
Calculation is executed using this prediction as the basis.
169
Chapter 10: Statistics & Regression Calculations
4. Press @ h.
05 TtestLinreg Tests the significance of the slope for the linear regression and its
correlation coefficient ρ.
Example
The test is for the slope β, and correlation coefficient ρ obtained
from statistical data X {65, 56, 78, 86, 92, 71, 68} and Y {95, 59,
88, 78, 75, 68, 80} are not equal to zero (β & ρ 0.)
1. Input the above lists X and Y into lists L1 and L2, respectively.
2. Press S E 0
5.
The parameter input screen
will appear.
3. Enter the appropriate value
into each field.
Equation items may not be
required.
If a linear regression
calculation has been
executed using the data, and the function equation has been
stored in Y0 to Y9, input that equation number for the
equation items.
4. Press @ h.
Answers are displayed on
the screen, where a, b
indicate regression coeffi-
cients, s indicates standard
deviation, r indicates the
correlation coefficient, and r
2
indicates the coefficient of
determination.
170
Chapter 10: Statistics & Regression Calculations
06 Tint1samp Finds the confidence interval for the population mean µ.
Example
Find the confidence interval for the statistical data of
{65.6, 62.8, 66.0, 64.5, 65.1, 65.3, 63.8, 64.2, 63.5, 64.4},
from a given population and the level of confidence is 0.99.
1. Enter the above statistical data into list L1.
2. Press S E 0 6.
The parameter input screen will appear.
3. Enter the C-level value of
0.99.
4. Set the List to L1 and press
E.
5. Press @ h.
Answers are displayed on
the screen, where sx
indicates the sample
standard deviation.
If you enter a value from 1
to 100 for the C-level, it will be changed to the % input mode.
In the numerical value input mode, n is a positive integer.
07 Tint2samp Finds the confidence interval for the difference of two sample
means, µ
1
and µ
2
.
Example
Use the following two sample data (used for example 04);
List 1 {2.37, 2.51, 2.43, 2.28, 2.46, 2.55, 2.49}
List 2 {2.63, 2.71, 2.56, 2.61, 2.55, 2.68, 2.42, 2.48, 2.51, 2.65},
with the level of confidence of 0.99.
171
Chapter 10: Statistics & Regression Calculations
1. Enter the above data in to lists L1 and L2.
2. Press S E 0
7.
The parameter input screen
will appear.
3. Enter the appropriate value
in each field.
4. Press @ h.
Answers are displayed on
the screen, where the
numerical value within ()
indicates the confidence
interval for the differences
between µ
1
and µ
2
when the
level of confidence is 99%.
In the numerical value input
mode, “n
1
”, “n
2
are positive integers.
08 Ztest1samp Tests the hypothesis of population mean µ.
Example
The average weight of a newly developed product is known to be
53.4 g and standard deviation (σ) is 4.5. Judge the validity when
the average weight of 20 units is 52.4 g (x).
Set the input method to value input mode
1. Press # S E 1 7 E.
2. Press S E 0
8.
The parameter input screen
will appear.
3. Set the alternate hypothesis
to µ µ
0
, µ < µ
0
and µ > µ
0
(two-tail test, one-tail test
settings). In this case,
choose µ µ
0
(two-tail test).
172
Chapter 10: Statistics & Regression Calculations
µ
0
indicates the hypothesis mean, σ indicates the population
standard deviation, x indicates the sample mean and n
indicates the sample size. (“n” is a positive integer.)
4. Enter the appropriate value in each field.
5. Press @ h.
Answers will be displayed on
the screen, where z indi-
cates the test statistic and p
indicates the p value of the
test.
09 Ztest2samp Tests the equality of two sample means, µ
1
and µ
2
.
Example
Test µ
1
> µ
2
where x
_
1
= 77.3, σ
1
= 3.4, n
1
= 30, and x
_
2
= 75.2, σ
2
=
2.8, n
2
= 20.
Set the input method to value input mode
1. Press # S E 1 7 E.
2. Press S E 0 9.
The parameter input screen will appear.
3. Enter the appropriate value
into each field.
4. Press @ h.
Answers will be displayed on
the screen.
173
Chapter 10: Statistics & Regression Calculations
10 Ztest1prop Tests the success probability P
0
of a population.
Example
A coin was tossed 100 times and landed head side up 42 times.
Normally, the probability of head facing up is 0.5. Test to see if the
coin is fair.
1. Press S E 1 0.
The parameter input screen will appear.
prop is the hypothesis probability. The test will be conducted
using hypothesis prop P
0
.
•x is the number of successes observed and n is the number
of trials (where n is a positive integer.)
2. Enter the appropriate value
into each field.
3. Press @ h.
p
^
: Success probability
obtained from the sample
data.
11 Ztest2prop Executes a comparative test for two success probabilities, (P
1
,
P
2
).
Example
Test the equality of P
1
and P
2
given the sample data n
1
= 50, x
1
=
16 and n
2
= 20, x
2
= 5, where the hypothesis is P
1
< P
2
.
1. Press S E 1 1.
The parameter input screen will appear.
2. Enter the appropriate value
into each field.
174
Chapter 10: Statistics & Regression Calculations
3. Press @ h.
Answers will be displayed on
the screen, where P
^
indi-
cates the calculated success
rate of the data combined
with sample data 1 and 2,
and P
^
1
and P
^
2
show the success rates of sample data 1 and 2,
respectively. n
1
and n
2
are positive integers.
12 Zint1samp Finds the confidence interval of a population mean, µ.
Example
The average weight of a newly developed product is known to be
52.4 g and standard deviation (σ) is 4.5. Given the average
weight of 20 units is 53.4 g (x), find the confidence interval of the
data where the level of confidence (C-level) is 0.95.
Set the input method to value input mode
1. Press # S E 1 7 E.
2. Press S E 1 2.
The parameter input screen will appear.
3. Enter the appropriate value
into each field.
4. Press @ h.
Answers will be displayed on
the screen, where the
numerical value within ()
indicates the confidence
interval with the level of
confidence at 0.95, that is, the confidence interval of this
sample data with the confidence level of 95% is between
51.427… and 55.372….
C-level indicates the level of confidence and n is a positive
integer.
175
Chapter 10: Statistics & Regression Calculations
13 Zint2samp Finds the confidence bound of two sample means µ
1
and µ
2
.
Example
Find the confidence interval of µ
1
and µ
2
of sample data with the
confidence level of 0.9, where x
_
1
= 77.3, σ
1
= 3.4, n
1
= 30 and x
_
2
=
75.2, σ
2
= 2.8, n
2
= 20 (x
_
1
and x
_
2
indicate sample means of two
data.)
Set the input method to value input mode
1. Press # S E 1 7 E.
2. Press S E 1 3.
Parameter input screen will appear.
3. Enter the appropriate value
into each field.
4. Press @ h.
Answers will be displayed on
the screen, where the
numeric value within ()
indicates the confidence
interval of µ
1
and µ
2
at a confidence level of 90%.
*n
1
and n
2
are positive integers.
14 Zint1prop Finds the confidence interval of the success probability of a
population from the success probability obtained from sample
data collected from a population.
Example
A coin was tossed 100 times and landed head side up 42 times.
Normally, the probability of head facing up is 0.5. Find the
confidence interval of the success probability at a confidence
level of 0.95.
1. Press S E 1 4.
The parameter input screen will appear.
176
Chapter 10: Statistics & Regression Calculations
2. Enter the appropriate value
into each field.
3. Press @ h.
Answers will be displayed on
the screen, where the
numerical value within ()
indicates the confidence
interval of the success probability at a confidence level of
95%.
*n is a positive integer.
15 Zint2prop Finds the confidence interval of the difference (P
1
-P
2
) of the
success probability obtained from the two sets of sample data
collected from two different populations.
Example
Find the confidence interval of the success probability (P
1
, P
2
) at
a confidence level of 0.9 for the two sets of sample data n
1
= 50,
x
1
= 16 and n
2
= 20, x
2
= 5.
1. Press S E 1 5.
The parameter input screen will appear.
2. Enter the appropriate value
into each field.
3. Press @ h.
4. Answers will be displayed on
the screen, where the
numerical value within ()
indicates the confidence
interval of the success probability P
1
-P
2
at a confidence level
of 90%.
*n
1
and n
2
are positive integers.
177
Chapter 10: Statistics & Regression Calculations
7. Distribution functions
The calculator has distribution features to find statistical calculations.
To enter the distribution menu,
1. Press S F (F DISTRI).
The distribution menu will appear.
2. There are 15 options in the
distribution menu. Press
' to navigate between
pages, and press { or
} to scroll the window.
3. Press E to select the function.
4. Input the specified values.
5. Press E to solve.
01 pdfnorm( pdfnorm(
value [, mean, standard deviation]
)
Finds the probability density of the specified value x for the
normal distribution N(µ, σ
2
). A list cannot be used.
* When mean (µ) and standard deviation (σ) are omitted, µ = 0
and σ = 1 are applied.
Example
Find the nominal distribution
probability density for x = 65
when the normal distribution of
the test score averages is 60
with a standard deviation of 6.
02 cdfnorm( cdfnorm(
lower limit, upper limit [, mean, standard deviation]
)
Calculates the normal distribution probability of a specified range
x for the normal distribution N(µ, σ
2
). A list cannot be used.
* When mean (µ) and standard deviation (σ) are omitted, µ = 0
and σ = 1 are applied.
Example
Calculate the probability of
range x = 54 to 66 in the above
sample.
178
Chapter 10: Statistics & Regression Calculations
03 InvNorm( InvNorm(
probability [, mean, standard deviation]
)
Finds the value of x of a given normal distribution probability. A
list cannot be used.
* When mean (µ) and standard deviation (σ) are omitted, µ = 0
and σ = 1 are applied.
Example
Find the value of x for the
probability of 0.8 in the above
sample.
04 pdfT( pdfT(
value, degree of freedom
)
Finds the probability density of a specified value x for the T
distribution with n degrees of freedom. A list cannot be used.
Limitations:
Degree of freedom 140
Degrees of freedom is a positive real number.
If decimal values are used for the degrees of freedom, the
calculator uses the closest integer of the given degree of
freedom.
An error may occur when an extremely large number is entered
for degree of freedom.
Example
Find the probability density of
the T distribution with 9 degrees
of freedom when x = 2.5.
179
Chapter 10: Statistics & Regression Calculations
05 cdfT( cdfT(
lower limit, upper limit, degree of freedom
)
Finds the T distribution probability within the specified range of x
for the T distribution with n degrees of freedom. A list cannot be
used.
Limitations:
Degree of freedom 670
Degrees of freedom is a positive real number.
Example
Find the probability of range X =
0.5 to 3.2 for T distribution with
9 degrees of freedom.
06 pdfχ
2
( pdfχ
2
(
value, degree of freedom
)
Finds the probability density of a specified value x for the χ
2
distribution with n degrees of freedom. A list cannot be used.
Limitations:
Degree of freedom 141
Degree of freedom is a positive real number.
Example
Find the probability density of χ
2
distribution with 15 degrees of
freedom when x = 6.5.
07 cdfχ
2
( cdfχ
2
(
lower limit, upper limit, degree of freedom
)
Finds the χ
2
distribution probability of a specified range of x for
the χ
2
distribution with n degrees of freedom. A list cannot be
used.
Degree of freedom is a positive real number.
Example
Find the probability of range x =
3 to 15 for the χ
2
distribution
with 10 degrees of freedom.
180
Chapter 10: Statistics & Regression Calculations
08 pdfF( pdfF(
value, degree of freedom of numerator, degree of
freedom of denominator
)
Finds the probability density of a specified value x for the F
distribution that possesses two independent degrees of freedom,
m and n. A list cannot be used.
Limitations: Degree of freedom 70
Degree of freedom is a positive real number.
An error may occur when an extremely large number is entered
for degrees of freedom.
Example
Find the probability density for
the F distribution generated with
degrees of freedom 15 and 10
when x = 3.
09 cdfF( cdfF(
lower limit, upper limit, degree of freedom of numerator,
degree of freedom of denominator
)
Finds the F distribution probability of a specified range x for the F
distribution with two independent degrees of freedom, m and n. A
list cannot be used.
Limitations:
Degree of freedom 670
Degree of freedom is a positive real number.
An error may occur when an extremely large number is entered
for degree of freedom.
Example
Find the probability of the range
x = 0 to 2.5 for the F distribution
generated with degrees of
freedom 15 and 10.
181
Chapter 10: Statistics & Regression Calculations
10 pdfbin( pdfbin(
trial number, success probability [, success number])
)
Finds the probability density of a specified value x for the binomial
distribution. A list cannot be used except for success numbers.
When the success number is not specified, the calculation is
executed by entering values from 0 to the trial number and
displays the list.
Limitations:
Success probability is 0 p 1.
Example
Find the probability density for
15 trials with x = 7, for the
binomial distribution with
success probability of 30%.
11 cdfbin( cdfbin(
trial number, success probability [, success number])
)
Finds the probability of a specified range x for the binomial
distribution. A list cannot be used except for success numbers.
When the success number is not specified, the calculation is
executed by entering values from 0 to the trial number and
displays the list.
Example
Find the probability of range up
to x = 7 for the F distribution
generated with degrees of
freedom 15 and 10.
12 pdfpoi( pdfpoi(
mean, value
)
Finds the probability density of a specified value x for a Poisson
distribution of mean µ.
Limitations: Mean of Poisson distribution 230
Example
Find the probability density of x
= 4, for the mean of a Poisson
distribution of 3.6.
182
Chapter 10: Statistics & Regression Calculations
13 cdfpoi( cdfpoi(
mean, value
)
Finds the probability of a specified range x for a Poisson distribu-
tion of mean mu.
Example
Find the probability within the
range up to x = 4.
14 pdfgeo( pdfgeo(
success probability, value
)
Finds the probability density of a specified value x for the geomet-
ric distribution.
Limitations:
Success probability is 0 p 1.
Example
Find the probability density of a
geometric distribution of
success at the 26th time with
success probability of 5.6%.
15 cdfgeo( cdfgeo(
success probability, value
)
Finds the probability of a specified range of x for the geometric
distribution.
Limitations:
Success probability is 0 p 1
Example
Find the probability for the
range up to x = 26 with success
probability of 5.6%.
183
Chapter 11
Financial Features
The financial calculation features include capabilities for compound interest calcula-
tions.
Press @ g.
The financial menu screen will appear.
Specifies the TVM-SOLVER mode.
Selects a financial calculation function
Specifies payment due (to pay at the beginning or end of
period)
Determines individual settings (in TVM-SOLVER mode)
1. Try it! 1
You plan to purchase a house for a price of
$300,000. The down payment is $100,000.
Calculate the monthly payments for a 30-
year loan at an annual interest rate of 5%
for the remaining $200,000.
•A horizontal line indicates a time flow (left to right) divided into
even sections — months in this case. Each section indicates a
compound period and the total number of sections indicates the
total number of periods for payment.
1. Draw the following cash flow diagram to simplify the problem.
Cash flow
Present Value (PV) = 300,000
100,000
= 200,000
Future Value (FV) = 0
N = 12
×
30
= 360
PMT = ?
Time flow
I = 5%
359358231
(
+
)
(
)
Draw a cash
flow diagram on
paper
184
Chapter 11: Financial Features
•Vertical arrows along the horizontal line indicate the cash flow.
An UP arrow indicates inflow (+) and a DOWN arrow indicates
outflow ().
The calculator considers the cash inflow for each period is
constant. (Even payment.)
2. Determine the time each payment is due.
For deposits and loan payments, the time each payment is
due (paid at the beginning or the end of the period) makes for
a different cash flow diagram.
Payment due at the end of the period
Payment due at the beginning of the period
In this case payment is due at the end of the period.
3. Determine the inflow and outflow and place the present value
(PV = $200,000) on the diagram.
We can consider the present value (PV) as a loan and thus
inflow (revenue) from the customer’s point of view. So, place
the PV at the top left end of the diagram. We also can consider
the principal interest total (Future value) as outflow (payment).
Draw a vertical line with a DOWN arrow on the top of the
diagram.
4. Complete the diagram with interest (I%), number of payment
periods (N), future value (FV), and other required numbers.
Cash flow
PV
FV
PMT
Time flow
I %
NN
121
(
+
)
(
)
Cash flow
PV
FV
PMT
Time flow
I %
NN
121
(
+
)
(
)
185
Chapter 11: Financial Features
11
. Input 360 for N (number of payment periods) and press E.
The cursor moves to “I%”.
12
. Input 5 for I% (annual
interest) and press E.
13
. Input 200000 for PV (present
value) and press E.
14
. Press E.
Since the payment amount is to be calculated from the other
values, no value must be entered for PMT (payment or
received amount).
15
. Press E again.
Since FV (future value) is “0” at the end, no value must be
entered for FV.
16
. Press 12 for P/Y (number of payments per year) and press
E.
The payment due time is set to
the end of period.
Payment due settings
Number of payment periods
Interest
Present value (principal sum)
Payment or received amount
Future value (principal interest total)
Number of payments per year
Cumulative interest per year
Setting the payment due time
5. Press @ g.
6. Press C (C PERIOD).
7. Press 1 (1 PmtEnd)
and press E.
Payment due time is now set
to the end of the period.
8. Press @ g.
9. Press A E.
10
. The following TVM-SOLVER screen will appear.
The payment due time is set to the end of the period.
Starting the
calculation
Enter the value
using the
SOLVER
function
186
Chapter 11: Financial Features
17
. Press E.
Usually C/Y (cumulative
interest per year) is the
same value as P/Y. If not,
enter the value instead.
18
. Press { 3 times to move the cursor to PMT (payment
amount).
19
. Press @ h.
The result will appear as follows.
20
.Payment amount per month
PM = -1073.643246
(Negative value indicates
payment.)
The numerical value input
format and display format in
the FINANCE mode comply to that of SETUP.
The above answer is given when the FSE setting in SET UP
menu is set to FloatPT. If you wish to display 2 digit decimal
point format, set TAB to 2 and FSE to FIX.
Answer: You have to pay $1,073.64 per month for 30 years.
Simple interest and compound interest
There are two ways to calculate interest: simple and compound. In the FINANCE
mode, the calculator can execute compound interest calculations.
Example of depositing $10,000 in a bank for 3 years at an annual interest rate of 3%
Period Simple interest Compound interest
First year Receive $10,000 x 0.03 = Receive $10,000 x 0.03 =
$300 $300
Second year Receive $300 (constantly) Receive $10,300 x 0.03 =
$309
Third year Receive $300 (constantly) Receive $10,609 x 0.03 =
$318.27
With compound interest, the amount in the bank is increased by receiving interest on
the interest gained during each calculated period.
187
Chapter 11: Financial Features
Try it! 2
If the monthly payments in the first example is limit to a fixed $800, how much
must be the present value (PV) and the required amount of down payment.
1. Press @ ; C 2 D 2
TAB is set to 2 and FSE is set to FIX.
2. Press C @ g
A and E .
The previous TVM-SOLVER
screen will appear with the
cursor flashing on N.
3. Press } three times to move the cursor to PMT.
4. Press _ 800 and E.
Be sure to enter the minus
sign to indicate payment.
5. Move the cursor to PV.
6. Press @ h.
7. PV will change to 149025.29
This indicates that the total
amount over 30 years will
be $149,025.29 if the
maximum monthly pay-
ment is limited to $800.
Cash flow
PV = 300,000
down payment
FV = 0
N = 360
PMT = 800
Time flow
I = 5%
359358231
(
+
)
(
)
Set the TAB and
FSE (2 and FIX
respectively)
188
Chapter 11: Financial Features
•So, the required amount of down payment is
$300,000 – $149,025.29 = $150,974.71.
Using the TVM-SOLVER screen, you can obtain various results
by inputting the known variables and then moving the cursor to
the unknown variable and pressing @ h . The value
where the cursor pointer is placed will be calculated from the
known variables.
Example
Compare the principal interest total when accumulating an
interest of 2.18% monthly on $100 for 5 years with payment due
at the beginning of the period and at the end of the period.
1. Payment due at the beginning of the period
1. Press @ g C 2 and press E.
2. Press @ g A E.
Payment due is now set to
the beginning of the period.
3. Enter the values.
4. Move the cursor to FV and
press @ h.
2. Payment due at the end of the period.
1. Press @ g C 1 and press E.
2. Press @ g A E.
Payment due is now set to
the beginning of the period.
3. Enter the values.
4. Move the cursor to FV and
press @ h.
189
Chapter 11: Financial Features
2. CALC functions
Press @ g B to access the CALC functions.
The CALC functions 01 to 05 calculate any of the following
variables from the other variables. (The same calculations are
possible as the SOLVER functions.)
N: Number of payment periods
I%: Interest
PV: Present value (principal sum)
PMT: Payment or received amount
FV: Future value (principal interest total)
P/Y: Number of payments per year
C/Y: Cumulative interest per year
The contents calculated on the calculation screen do not affect
the variable values in the TVM-SOLVER.
01 slv_pmt solv_pmt [(
N, I%, PV, FV, P/Y, C/Y
)]
Calculates monthly payment (PMT)
02 slv_I% slv_I% [(
N, PV, PMT, FV, P/Y, C/Y
)]
Calculates annual interest
03 slv_PV slv_PV [(
N, I%, PMT, FV, P/Y, C/Y
)]
Calculates present value (PV)
04 slv_N slv_N [(
I%, PV, PMT, FV, P/Y, C/Y
)]
Calculates the number of payment periods (N)
05 slv_FV slv_FV [(
N, I%, PV, PMT, P/Y, C/Y
)]
Calculates future value (FV)
190
Chapter 11: Financial Features
06 Npv ( Npv (
Interest rate, initial investment, list of following col-
lected investment [, frequency list]
)
Calculates the net present value and evaluates the validity of the
investment. You can enter unequal cash flows in the list of
following collected investment.
Example
The initial investment is $25,000
planning to achieve the profits
each year as shown on the
right, Evaluate whether annual
revenue of 18% is achieved.
*You can execute the calcula-
tion by using a list or a
frequency list calculation.
The result indicates that annual revenue of 18% cannot be
secured.
07 Irr ( Irr (
initial investment, list of following collected investment [,
frequency list] [, assumed revenue rate]
)
Calculates the investment revenue rate where the net present
value is 0.
Example
If the investment for the sales
plan in the previous example is
$28,000, how much is the
investment revenue rate?
12.42 is obtained as the
answer, thus, the investment revenue rate for the above
condition is 12.42%.
* In the previous example, revenues following the investment
value (input using minus sign) were assumed to be positive.
However, when the assumed revenue is set to minus (in other
words, more than two inverse symbols), the assumed revenue
rate must be entered at the end. Otherwise an error may occur.
$25,000
$7K
$9K
$5K
$8K
$11K
12345
Year
191
Chapter 11: Financial Features
The following CALC functions, 08 Bal, 09 ΣPrn and
10 ΣInt require the values of I%, PV and PMT
variables. Enter the values beforehand in the TVM-
SOLVER function.
Example using the 08 and 10
calculations
You plan to purchase a house for the price of $300,000. The down
payment is $100,000. Calculate the monthly payments for a 30-
year loan at an annual interest rate of 5% for the remaining
$200,000.
08 Bal ( Bal (
number of payments [, decimal place to round]
)
Calculates loan balance.
Calculate the loan balance after
15 years (180 months).
09 ΣPrn ( ΣPrn (
initial number of payments, end number of payments [,
decimal place to round]
).
Calculates the principal amount of the total payments.
Compare the principal amount
of the total payments after 5 (1
to 60 months) and 10 years (61
to 120 months).
10 ΣInt ( ΣInt (
Initial number of payments, end number of payments [,
decimal place to round]
)
Calculates the sum of the interest on the payments.
Compare the sum of the
interest on the payment sum
after 5 years and 10 years.
192
Chapter 11: Financial Features
Conversion functions
11 Apr ( Apr (
effective interest rate, number of settlements
)
Converts effective interest rate to nominal interest rate
Example
If the effective interest rate is
12.55%, how much is the
nominal interest rate for the
quarterly compound interest? If
the monthly compound interest
rate is 10.5%, how much is the
nominal interest rate?
12 Eff ( Eff (
nominal interest rate, number of settlements
)
Converts nominal interest rate to effective interest rate
Example
If the annual (nominal) interest
rate is 8%, how much is the
effective interest rate for
monthly compound interest?
How much is it over half a year?
13 days ( days (
start month.day year, end month.day year
)
days (
day month.year, day month.year
)
Calculates the number of days between dates entered (within the
range of 1950 to 2049)
Year, month, and day must be
entered in 2-digit form. For
example, enter 02 for 2002.
Calculate the number of days
from September 1, 1997 to
December 31, 2004.
193
Chapter 11: Financial Features
3. VARS Menu
The VARS menu consist of a list of the variables used for the TVM-SOLVER functions.
The VARS menu can be used to enter values in the sub-menu
within the Finance menu.
1. Press @ g D.
2. The VARS sub-menu will
appear.
3. Select the appropriate
variable to use.
The variables in the VARS sub-menu are the same as those of
the TVM-SOLVER feature.
1. Press # @ g
D 1 E.
2. Press @ g D
2 E.
3. Press @ g D 3 E.
Each variable of the TVM-SOLVER can be recalled and then
reentered.
Reenter 400 for N instead of 360
1. Press 400 R.
2. Press @ g D
1 E.
How to recall
the content of N
How to recall
the content of
I%
How to recall
the content of
PV
How to reenter
the value
194
Chapter 12
The SOLVER Feature
The SOLVER feature is one of the calculator’s most powerful and distinctive features,
and helps you solve math problems with various analysis methods.
Using this feature, problems from linear equations to complex formulas can be solved
with ease.
To access the SOLVER feature, press @ '; to exit, press #.
Note: The SOLVER feature is not available in the Basic mode.
The SOLVER feature shares variables with other calculator
features. These variables can be called up or defined within the
SOLVER feature OR any other features. For example, solving/
defining a value of “A” within the SOLVER feature will also
change the global value of “A”.
1. Three Analysis Methods: Equation, Newton,
and Graphic
To switch your preferred analysis style:
1. Go into the SOLVER menu by pressing @ ' WITHIN
the SOLVER window. The SOLVER menu appears with four
menu items.
2. While A METHOD item is
selected on the left, select
your preferred method by
pressing 1, 2, or
3.
The Equation method is useful when there is only one unknown
variable. For example, if you know the values of B and C for an
expression “A
+ B = C”, use the Equation method.
Example
Determine the value of “C” in “A = 2B
2
+ 4C”, when A = 4, and
B = 5.
Equation
method
195
Chapter 12: The SOLVER Feature
1. Enter SOLVER by pressing @ '. The word SOLVER
will flash on the screen, indicating that you are now in the
SOLVER feature mode.
2. Enter the equation “A = 2B
2
+ 4C”.
Press A A A =
2 A B y + 4
A C.
3. Press E.
The screen above right appears, indicating that there are 3
variables to be assigned.
Note: If values were assigned to those variables prior to this operation,
then the previously set values will be shown here. For example,
“C = 57” may show up in this
window; this simply indicates
the value of “C” was previously
set to “57”.
4. Enter “4” for variable “A”, and
“5” for variable “B”.
Press 4 E 5 E.
5. When the two known values have been specified, make sure
that the cursor is at the value yet to be determined (in this
case, the value of “C”).
6. Press @ h to
execute the SOLVER. The
value of “C” will be obtained.
* After the solution has been
found, press C to return
to the variable input screen. You may change the numeric
values for the variables and select another unknown variable to
solve.
*To edit the equation, press C on the variable input screen.
The equation input screen allows you to correct or edit the
previously input equation.
196
Chapter 12: The SOLVER Feature
Newton’s method is a technique of finding approximate solutions
to a math problem via calculus, when conventional algebraic
techniques just cannot work. If the Equation method fails, the
calculator will automatically switch to Newton’s method.
Example
Solve “X
2
+ 4X 2 = 0”.
1. Enter SOLVER by pressing @ '. If you have items left
on the screen, clear the entries by pressing the C key
several times.
2. Enter “X
2
+ 4X 2”. When
the expression is entered as
a non-equation format, then
“=0” is automatically as-
sumed at the end. When
done, press E.
3. The next screen indicates
the variable “X” and its
previously set value. This
value will be assumed as the
starting point of the calcula-
tion segments, and the
Newton SOLVER will find the closest approximation to the
starting point. Enter “0”, and press E.
4. Now, press @ h to
execute the SOLVER. Since
this cannot be solved using
the Equation method, the
calculator automatically
switches analysis to
Newton’s method.
5. The next window confirms
the starting point of the
analysis (set to “X = 0” from
step #3), and the size of
each step (default is set to
“0.001”). Press @ h.
Newton’s
method
197
Chapter 12: The SOLVER Feature
6. The following window shows
the approximate value of X
(0.449489742), the right side
value of the equation
(assumed as “0”, at step #2),
the left side value (which the
entered expression results to this value when the value X is
entered), and the difference between the left and the right
side.
7. Since the L-R difference
above indicates a margin of
error, try entering smaller
steps. Press C to go
back to step #3. Enter the
value of X, then press @
h to execute the SOLVER again. When the next window
appears, try entering smaller step value (“0.00001”, for
example).
8. Press E to register the
step value change, then
@ h. Although the
value of X appears to be
unchanged, the margin of
error will have become small
enough (“0”, in this example), to be as close to zero as
possible.
Note: As you may well know, there may be more than one solution to
the equation. To obtain the value of the other solutions, set the
starting point of Newton’s method lower (“
-10”, for example) or
execute the SOLVER again with the current solution as a starting
point.
198
Chapter 12: The SOLVER Feature
The Graphic method is another way of approximating solutions,
using graphical representations. This method is particularly useful
when finding more than one solution on a graph axis.
Example
Obtain values for “Y = X
3
3X
2
+ 1”, when Y = 0.
1. Press @ ' to enter SOLVER. Clear screen entries by
pressing C several times.
2. Enter “Y = X
3
3X
2
+ 1” into
the initial window, and press
E.
3. In the next window, set the Y
value as “0”, and press
E. The right side value
of the equation is now set.
Note: Unlike in the Newton’s method,
the X value will not be assumed
as the starting point for the
Graphic method.
4. Before proceeding further,
you will need to set the
SOLVER to the Graphic
method. Press @ '
to call up the SOLVER
menu, and press A (for
“A METHOD”), then 3 (for “3 Graphic”). The Graphic
method is now set.
5. Press @ h to proceed.
6. Next in the following window,
specify the range of analysis
that will incorporate all
possible solution. In this
example, we will set the
beginning point at
-1”, and
the end point at “3”. Press E at each variable entry.
Graphic method
199
Chapter 12: The SOLVER Feature
Note: The analysis will be limited to the range specified; a solution
outside of the analysis range will not be detected. If no crossing
point is found in the range, then a message “No solution found”
will show at the bottom of the screen.
7. Pressing @ h at this point will engage the analysis,
as well as the graphical representation of the equation. Note
that while the cursor flashes at the upper right corners of the
screen, the calculator is busy processing tasks.
8. When the processing is
complete, you will get the
first value of X (the small-
est), with a flashing star on
the graph at the crossing
point.
To obtain the next X value,
press @ k.
Note: To enlarge a part of graph after
the solution has been found,
you may use the ZOOM Box
function. Press Z and use the cursor for defining the box
area.
200
Chapter 12: The SOLVER Feature
2. Saving/Renaming Equations for Later Use
The expressions you have entered in the SOLVER can be named
and stored:
1. Go to the SOLVER menu by
pressing @ '.
2. Press C to select the C
SAVE menu, and press
E.
3. When the next screen
appears, ALPHA LOCK
mode is automatically set
and the cursor is changed to
A”, indicating that alphabet
characters can be entered.
To enter numbers, press A.
The equation name should consist of 8 characters/numbers or
less.
4. When done, press E. The screen goes back to the
SOLVER function screen.
Saved SOLVER expressions can also be renamed:
1. Go to the SOLVER menu, and press D to select the D
RENAME sub-menu.
2. A list of saved equation
names appears in the sub-
menu. Select the equation
name you wish to change.
For example, press 0
1 to select the first item
of the list.
3. When renaming is complete, press E to save the change.
The screen goes back to the SOLVER function screen.
201
Chapter 12: The SOLVER Feature
3. Recalling a Previously Saved Equation
To recall a stored SOLVER equation:
1. Go to the SOLVER menu,
and press B to select
the B EQTN sub-menu.
2. A list of saved equation
names appears in the sub-
menu. Select the equation you wish to call back.
3. Press E. The stored equation is called back.
Note: Any changes unsaved prior to recalling will be lost. Also be aware
that any changes to the recalled equation will not be retained
unless saved manually.
202
Chapter 13
Programming Features
The calculator has programming features that enable automatic processing of a series
of calculations any number of times.
* The Programming features are only supported by the Advanced mode. In the Basic
mode, only the execution of programs is available.
Almost all the calculation and graphing language can be used in programs as well as
the usual control flow statements such as If, For, While and Goto (with Label).
Please note that complex numbers cannot be used in programming.
1. Try it!
Display a message “HELLO WORLD” on the
display.
1. Press P.
The program menu screen will appear.
A EXEC Executes the
selected program
B EDIT Opens a stored
program file.
C NEW Creates a new
program file
* In the Basic mode, only the A EXEC menu item will appear.
Creating a new
program
203
Chapter 13: Programming Features
2. Press C E.
A new program window will
open.
3. Input the program name
(HELLO) on the top line of
the screen.
Up to 8 characters can be used for the title.
4. Press E.
5. The cursor will move to the program input field just under the
title.
6. Press P.
The program menu will open.
The commands and other
statements are preinstalled
in the calculator.
Do not directly type in commands using the Alphabetical
mode, select each command from the program menu.
Note: Press @ j, and you can access all the available com-
mands at once.
7. Select A 1.
8. Press P.
9. Select A 2.
The characters following a
double quotation mark can
be manipulated as text. No double quotation mark is required
to close the text.
10
. Press @ . to enter
the alphabetic lock mode.
11
.Type HELLO WORLD.
Up to 160 alphanumeric
characters can be input per
line. (Strings of up to 158 characters maximum can be entered
per line excluding commands, because each command is
regarded as a single character.
Starting
programming
Entering a
command
Entering the
alphabetical
input lock mode
204
Chapter 13: Programming Features
When a line exceeds the width of the screen, the display will
shift to the left.
12
. Press E.
The cursor will move to the next line and the data input will be
stored.
Store the program line by line by pressing E, { or
}.
13
. Press @ q to exit the program edit screen.
14
. Press P A.
A list of stored programs will
appear.
15
. Press 0 1 to
execute the program 01
“HELLO”.
2. Programming Hints
Press P B and then the appropriate numbers to open
the stored program.
Press @ i to enter the insert type mode.
Press E to go to the next line. Be sure to press @ i
again to turn off the insert type mode and return to type over
mode.
Press E twice to insert a blank line.
Press A to enter characters. Press @ . to use a
ALPHA-LOCK mode to input a series of alphabetical characters.
In general, only a single command can be input per line.
Store the
program line by
line
Execute the
program
Editing the
program
Adding com-
mands, strings
or command
lines to the
program
Entering
alphabetical
characters
(uppercase
only)
Inputting
commands
205
Chapter 13: Programming Features
After pressing E, } or {, the line will be stored in
memory. Otherwise, it is not stored. Be sure to store the all lines
by pressing E ({ or }) before quitting editing
(pressing @ q).
Blank lines are ignored during execution. You can include blank
lines to gain better readability.
Move the cursor to the line you wish to delete and press C.
Move the cursor to on or after the letter you wish to delete and
press D or B, respectively.
Press @ p and use C DEL. (See Chapter 14 OPTION
Menu, page 224).
Press P H in the program edit mode. (See page 216 for
details)
Press { to move the cursor to the program name field. Enter
the new name and press E or }.
Pressing E again after execution of the program completes.
Press O or @ q to break the execution process.
Storing a
program line by
line
Deleting a line
Blank line
Deleting
command or
strings
Deleting an
entire program
Copying a line
to another
location
Changing the
program name
Re-executing
the program
Break the
execution
process
206
Chapter 13: Programming Features
3. Variables
Single letters (uppercase letter from A to Z and θ) can be used as variables.
Defined once in one program, a variable is set as a global variable across all other
stored programs unless redefined.
Hence results calculated in one program can be used by another.
Only value (numbers) can be set as variables.
Strings cannot be set as variables.
Setting a variable
Use R to input a specific value or the value of formula into
the variable. Do not use = (comparison operands) to set the
values into variable.
5 X The variable X is set to the value 5.
MX + B Y The variable Y is set to the value of formula MX + B.
4. Operands
Almost all the calculation operands can be used in a program.
Input an operand directly from the keys (+, , ×, ÷, sin, cos, log and others) or using
MATH, STAT, LIST, MATRIX and other menus.
Comparison operands
The calculator has 6 compari-
son operands.
Press M F and select
an appropriate comparison
operand.
= Equal Not equal
> Greater than Greater than or equal
< Less than Less than or equal
207
Chapter 13: Programming Features
5. Programming commands
•Print, Input, Wait, Rem, End and other commands can be used in a program.
Screen settings, data input/output, graph settings and others can be controlled from
a program.
Press P in the program edit mode to input the command.
A PRGM menu P A
1 Print Print
variable
Print
“character strings [“]
Displays the value of the variable on the screen.
The display format may vary according to the SET UP menu
settings.
Character strings displayed by the print command will break at
the edge of the screen.
2 “
command “ strings
Characters enclosed by double-quote marks are considered to be
strings.
The closing double-quote can be omitted when it would appear at
the end of a line.
3 Input Input
[“prompt strings”,] variable
Enables the user to input a
value (list, etc.) for the specified
variable during execution. A
message “variable = ?” or
“prompt strings?” will appear on
the screen while the calculator
waits for data input.
Prompt strings include alpha-
betical words, numbers, and
other character strings that can
be entered by keys and menus.
208
Chapter 13: Programming Features
4 Wait Wait [
natural number
(1 to 255)]
Interrupts execution for the
(natural number) of seconds. If
no value is specified, interrup-
tion continues until any key is
pressed.
•A symbol will flash at the
upper right corner of the screen during the wait.
This command can be used for displaying intermediate results
or other information.
5 Rem Rem
comments
Comments start with Rem and extend to the end of the line.
These lines are ignored at execution.
Comments should be entered as notes for future reference,
though it should be noted that they do occupy some memory
space.
6 End End
Indicates the end of a program.
End is not necessary at the last line of the program.
7 Key Key
variable
If a numeric key or one of the cursor keys is pressed, the variable
is set to the corresponding numeric value as specified in the
following table.
keys Numbers keys Numbers keys Numbers
0 0 5 5 ' 10
1 1 6 6 ; 11
2 2 7 7 { 12
3 3 8 8 } 13
4 4 9 9
Keys and Corresponding Numbers
209
Chapter 13: Programming Features
B BRNCH menu P B
See 6. Flow control tools on page 214.
C SCRN menu P C
C SCRN menu commands are used to display or clear the
screen.
1 ClrT ClrT
Clears the program text screen without affecting the plotted
graph.
2 ClrG ClrG
Clears the graph screen without affecting the specified graph.
After the graph screen is cleared, the specified graph statement is
drawn.
3 DispT DispT
Displays the program text screen.
4 DispG DispG
Displays the graph screen.
D I/O menu P D
This menu is used to send or receive data from externally
connected devices.
1 Get Get
variable
Receives data from externally connected devices.
2 Send Send
variable
Sends data to externally connected devices.
210
Chapter 13: Programming Features
E SETUP menu P E
SETUP menu commands are used to set the various settings
used in graphing and calculations.
01 Rect Rect
Sets the graph coordinates as X and Y coordinates.
02 Param Param
Sets the graph coordinates as parametric coordinates.
03 Polar Polar
Sets the graph coordinates as polar coordinates.
04 Web Web
Sets the graph coordinates as axes in sequence graphs.
u(n
1) is set to the X axis and u(n) is set to the Y axis.
05 Time Time
Sets the graph coordinates as axes in sequence graphs.
n is set to the X axis and u(n), v(n) and w(n) is set to the Y axis.
06 uv uv
Sets the graph coordinates as the axes of sequence graphs.
u(n) is set to the X axis and v(n) is set to the Y axis.
07 uw uw
Sets the graph coordinates as the axes of sequence graphs.
u(n) is set to the X axis and w(n) is set to the Y axis.
08 vw vw
Sets the graph coordinates as the axes of sequence graphs.
v(n) is set to the X axis and w(n) is set to the Y axis.
09 Deg Deg
10 Rad Rad
11 Grad Grad
Sets the angle mode to degree, radian and gradient, respectively.
211
Chapter 13: Programming Features
12 FloatPt FloatPt
13 Fix Fix
14 Sci Sci
15 Eng Eng
16 Tab Tab
integer
(0 to 9)
Sets the number display mode to floating point, fixed decimal,
scientific and engineering, respectively.
17 Decimal Decimal
18 Mixed Mixed
19 Improp Improp
20 x±yi x±yi
21 r θ r θ
Sets the answering mode to the one specified.
F FORMAT menu P F
F FORMAT menu commands are used to set the graph format.
01 RectCursor RectCursor
Sets the graph coordinate display format to X - Y axes.
02 PolarCursor PolarCursor
Sets the graph coordinates display format to polar coordinates.
03 ExprON ExprON
Sets the graph equation to be displayed on the graph screen.
04 ExprOFF ExprOFF
Sets the graph equation to not be displayed on the graph screen.
05 Y’ ON Y’ON
Sets the derived function (Y’) to be displayed on the graph
screen.
06 Y’ OFF Y’OFF
Sets the derived function (Y’) to not be displayed on the graph
screen.
212
Chapter 13: Programming Features
07 AxisON AxisON
Sets the specified axis to be displayed on the graph screen.
08 AxisOFF AxisOFF
Sets the specified axis to not be displayed on the graph screen.
09 GridON GridON
Sets the grid lines to be displayed on the graph screen.
10 GridOFF GridOFF
Sets the grid lines to not be displayed on the graph screen.
11 Connect Connect
Draws a graph with connected lines.
12 Dot Dot
Draws a graph with dots.
13 Sequen Sequen
Draws the graphs in sequential order.
14 Simul Simul
Draws the graphs simultaneously.
213
Chapter 13: Programming Features
G S_PLOT menu P G
S_PLOT menu commands are used for statistics plotting.
1 Plt 1( Sets the statistical graph settings for plot 1.
2 Plt 2( Sets the statistical graph settings for plot 2.
3 Plt 3( Sets the statistical graph settings for plot 3.
The above menu commands have the same usage as the
following:
Plt1(
graph type, X list name [, Y list name, frequency list]
)
* Press [ to specify a graph type.
4 PlotON PlotON
[number]
Sets drawing of the specified statistical graph to on.
If no number is specified, this command turns on all of the
statistical graphs.
5 PlotOFF PlotOFF
[number]
Sets drawing of the specified statistical graph to off.
If no number is specified, this command turns off all of the
statistical graphs.
6 LimON LimON
This commands turns on the limit lines for upper, lower, and mean
values.
7 LimOFF LimOFF
This commands turns off the limit lines for upper, lower, and
mean values.
214
Chapter 13: Programming Features
6. Flow control tools
The calculator has the common flow control tools such as Goto - Label loop struc-
tures, and If-, For- and While-statement clauses for enhancing a program’s efficiency.
It also has the capability for subroutines.
It is recommended to use If, For or While statements rather than Goto-Label loop
structures.
To access the flow control tools, use the P B BRNCH menu.
01 Label Label
label name
Specifies a branch destination for Goto or Gosub.
The same Label name cannot be used in two places within the
same program.
Up to 10 characters can be used for a Label name.
Up to 50 Labels can be used in a single program.
02 Goto Goto
label name
To shift the program execution to a label.
03 If If
conditional statements
Goto
label name
or
If
conditional statements
Then
commands or multiple statements
*
[Else
commands or multiple statements
]
EndIf
* Multiple statements mean a group of statement lines separated
by colons(:) that are evaluated as a single line.
Within a second structure it is possible to use the following menu
items.
04 Then
05 Else
06 EndIf
* Use a comparison operand in a condition statement.
* Up to 115 If clauses can be nested, though if combined with
other types of loops, the maximum nested loop number may
vary due to the memory capacity.
215
Chapter 13: Programming Features
For
variable, initial value, end value [, increment]
commands or multiple statements
Next
The increment value can be omitted. The default value is 1.
•For and Next statements must be placed at the beginning of the
line.
If the comparisons
variable
>
end value
(
positive
) or
variable
<
end value
(
negative
) are satisfied, the program will end the loop
and go to the line indicated by the Next command.
Up to 5 For loops can be nested, though if combined with other
types of loops, the maximum nested loop number may vary due
to the memory capacity.
It is highly recommended that Label and Goto statements are
not used in For loop structures.
While
conditional statements
commands or multiple statements
WEnd
While and WEnd statements must be placed at the beginning of
the line.
Multiple While loops can be nested to within the memory
capacity.
Conditional statements are evaluated before entering the While
clause.
It is highly recommended that Label and Goto statements are
not used in While loop structures.
* Up to 8 while loops can be nested, though if combined with
other types of loops, the maximum nested loop number may
vary due to the memory capacity.
07 For
08 Next
09 While
10 WEnd
216
Chapter 13: Programming Features
Gosub
label name
.....................
End
[Rem
start of the subroutine (label name)
]
Label
label name
Statements
Return
Subroutine structures can be used for programming.
The Gosub label name must be the same as the Label starting
the subroutine.
•A Return statement is necessary at the end of the subroutine.
When the Return statement is executed, the calculator executes
the next line after the Gosub statement.
Up to 10 subroutines can be nested.
7. Other menus convenient for programming
H COPY menu P H
You can copy and paste line by line using the COPY menu
commands.
1. Move the cursor to the line that you wish to copy.
2. Press P H.
3. Select 1 StoLine and press
E.
The selected line will be
stored in the memory.
4. Move the cursor to the line where you wish to paste the stored
line.
11 Gosub
12 Return
217
Chapter 13: Programming Features
5. Press P H, select 2
RclLine and press E.
The stored line will be
inserted at the targeted
position.
Please note that only a single line can be stored in the
memory.
VARS menu
Functions that control the
graph screen can be selected
from the VARS menu.
Press @ z to display
the VARS menu (shown to the
right).
* There are differences in functions between the Advanced mode
and the Basic mode. The following menus and their descriptions
are based on the Advanced mode.
A EQVARS Specifies the graph equation (Y1 to Y9, and Y0, X1T•Y1T to
X6T•Y6T, R1 to R6).
B WINDOW Specifies the functions that set the graph display screen size
(Xmin, Ymax, Tstep, etc.).
C STOWIN Specifies the stored zoom (window) setting value (Zm_Xmin,
Zm_Ymax, etc.).
D L_DATA Specifies list data (L_Data1 to L_Data9, and L_Data0).
E G_DATA Specifies the graph data (G_Data1 to G_Data9, and G_Data0).
F PICTUR Specifies picture data (Pict1 to Pict9, and Pict0).
G TABLE Specifies table setting values (Table Start, Table Step, Table List).
H STAT Specifies statistics, functions ( x
_
, Σx, y
_
… ), regression expres-
sions, points and statistical verification functions.
218
Chapter 13: Programming Features
The commands and functions in the VARS menu can be
displayed on the screen. Current setting data can also be reset.
The results of arithmetic functions can also be displayed.
The ZOOM command is selected directly from the ZOOM menu.
Names of some ZOOM commands change when inserted into
programs. These are [A ZOOM], [C POWER], [D EXP], [E
TRIG], and [F HYP] of the ZOOM menu.
“Zm_” is automatically added to each of these functions when
inserted into programs.
Example
Zm_Auto, Zm_x
2
, Zm_sin, etc.
Always enter the argument for functions requiring an argument
at the end of the command, such as the CALC function (@
k). An error will be returned for commands not accompa-
nied by an argument.
Example
Value 5
Example
Set Xmin =
-3, Xmax = 10, Xscl = 1, Ymin = -5, Ymax = 5, Yscl =
1 in the WINDOW screen.
Use R to input the settings.
Expression Operational sequence
-3 Xmin _ 3 R @ z B E A 1 E
10 Xmax 10 R @ z E 2 E
1 Xscl 1 R @ z E 3 E
-5 Ymin _ 5 R @ z E 4 E
5 Ymax 5 R @ z E 5 E
1 Yscl 1 R @ z E 6 E
* Operation to input a function equation (for example, x
2
+ 2) to
the graphic equation “Y1” is also made using R in the same
manner as described above.
“X
2
+ 2” Y1: P A 2 X y + 2 P
A 2 R @ z A E A 1
Note: Function equations cannot be assigned in the graphic equations,
such as Y1, if the EDITOR mode under SET UP is set to Equa-
tion. Switch the EDITOR to One line mode prior to assigning such
graphic equations.
219
Chapter 13: Programming Features
Example
The following data are included in list L1.
L1: 165, 182.5, 173.8, 166.5, 185.3
A one-variable calculation was executed based on this data.
After returning to the calculation screen, average values can be
viewed by using the following procedure.
Press @ z H
E A 0 2 to
display “x
_
on the screen.
Press E to obtain the
average value of X as
determined in the previous calculation.
In this way, the contents of an immediately preceding statistical
calculation can be stored as statistical values.
These contents remain valid until the next statistical calculation
is executed, even if the power is turned off.
The same is true even for regression calculations and verifica-
tion calculations.
8. Debugging
After programming, it is required to debug the program.
1. Press P A and select the program to debug.
If any bugs are present, error messages will appear.
The following example indicates that the same label name has
been used two or more times.
2. Press ; or ' to display the line where the error exists
and correct the mistake.
220
Chapter 13: Programming Features
Execution can be interrupted by pressing O.
Use this command if the program enters an infinite loop. Press
; or ' to display the program source with the cursor on
the line where interrupted.
* Refer to Appendix “Error Codes and Error Messages” on page
235.
* It is highly recommended that goto-Label statements are not
used in If, While and For loop structures.
* Multiple statements cannot be used in a command line such as
Else, EndIf, Next, While and WEnd. It is recommended not to
use multiple statements.
9. Sample programs
* Fill the matrix M × N with random numbers from 0 to 9.
Input “ROW:”, M
Input “COLUMN:”, N
{M, N} dim(mat A)
1 I
While I M
1 J
While J N
int (random x10) mat A(I, J)
J + 1 J
WEnd
I + 1 I
WEnd
Print mat A
Wait
End
When an infinite
loop occurs
Ask and set the
dimension of
mat A
Generate integer
from 0 to 9 using
int and random
function and set it
to each element
Print mat A for
confirmation
MATFILL
221
Chapter 13: Programming Features
10 dim(L1)
Gosub INSCORE
Gosub AVGSCORE
Plt1(Hist, L1)
Zm_Stat
Wait
End
Label INSCORE
1 I
Input “ENTER SCORE”, A
A L1(1)
2 I
For I, 2, 10
Input “ENTER NEXT”, A
A L1(I)
Next
Return
Label AVGSCORE
Print “AVERAGE IS
Median(L1) M
Print M
Wait 3
Return
HIST
Sequencially
input the data in
list L1.
Calculate the
median of List
L1.
222
Chapter 14
OPTION Menu
The calculator is equipped with OPTION menu for adjusting the display contrast,
checking memory usage, deleting stored data, transferring data, and resetting the
calculator’s memory.
Accessing the OPTION Menu
Press @ p.
The OPTION Menu will appear.
A: Adjusts the display contrast
B: Checks the memory usage
C: Deletes files
D: Link command to use with another calculator or PC.
E: Resets the calculator
1. Adjusting the screen contrast
1. Press @ p.
The screen contrast setting window will appear.
2. Press + to darken or - to lighten the screen.
2. Checking the memory usage
The memory usage window enables you to check how much memory you have used.
If the memory is nearly full, delete files or reset the calculator to operate safely.
1. Press @ p.
2. Press B.
The memory check window
will appear. The remaining
number of bytes of user
memory will be shown on the display.
The user memory is used to store data for graph equations,
graph screens, matrices, lists and so on.
223
Chapter 14: OPTION Menu
3. If you want check the details,
press E.
The detailed memory usage
window will appear.
The total remaining memory
will appear on the bottom line of the screen.
4. Press } to scroll the
window.
List: The amount of memory (bytes) used by lists
Matrix: The amount of memory (bytes) used by matrices
Graph Eqn: The amount of memory (bytes) used by graph equations
Solver Eqn: The amount of memory (bytes) used by solver equations
Program: The amount of memory (bytes) used by program files
Picture: The amount of memory (bytes) used by graph pictures
G_Data: The amount of memory (bytes) used by stored graph data
L_Data: The amount of memory (bytes) used by stored list data
Slide: The amount of memory (bytes) used by slide shows the user has
created
224
Chapter 14: OPTION Menu
3. Deleting files
Press @ p C to enter the delete menu.
The sub-menu items are the same as those of the Memory Check menu (List, Matrix,
Graph Eqn, Solver Eqn, Program, Picture, G_Data, L_Data and Slide).
Deletions can be executed entry by entry.
1. Press @ p C
2.
The matrix deletion window
will appear with the cursor
pointer at the top (mat A).
2. Move the cursor pointer to mat C using { / }.
3. Press E.
mat C will disappear and the
mat C line will become
empty.
Press @ q to cancel
the delete option.
Above procedures and displays are only an example. Displayed
items may vary according to data input and use.
* Press @ p C 0 to delete the memories
previously entered.
4. Linking to another EL-9900 or PC
Using the optional CE-451L or CE-LK2, the EL-9900 can be linked to another EL-
9900 or PC, respectively.
To transfer data, press @ p D to open the Link option window. Press
1 to send data and press 2 to receive data.
1. Connect the calcula-
tors securely using
the optional CE-451L
communication cable.
Make sure the commu-
nication cable is firmly inserted into the ports of both calculators.
* Use the CE-451L only for linking two EL-9900’s.
The EL-9900 can only be linked to another EL-9900.
To delete the
matrix mat C
Transmission
between EL-
9900’s
225
Chapter 14: OPTION Menu
2. Press @ p D on both calculators.
3. Press 2 on the receiv-
ing machine.
The receive mode screen
will appear on the display.
4. Press 1 on the sending
machine.
5. The send menu will appear on the display. Specify the data to
send from the following categories.
A SELECT Displays the menu window to send the data specified as follows:
01 ALL Displays a list of all
the stored files
category by category.
02 List Displays a list of all
the stored list files.
03 Matirx Displays a list of all the stored matrix files.
04 Graph Eqn Displays a list of all the stored graph equations.
05 Solver Eqn Displays a list of all the stored solver equations.
06 Program Displays a list of all the stored program files.
07 G_Data Displays a list of all the stored graph data files.
08 L_Data Displays a list of all the stored list data files.
09 Picture Displays a list of all the stored picture files.
10 Slide Displays a list of all the user-made slide show data.
11 A - Z, θ Displays a list of variables A to Z and θ.
B BACKUP Send all the data stored in the calculator memory.
226
Chapter 14: OPTION Menu
6. Select the item to send using { / } and pressing
E. A will be placed by the selected item.
7. Press @ E to send.
8. Transmission begins and a
busy message will appear on
the displays of the both
calculators.
An data in the same memory locations in the receiver will be
automatically overwritten.
Up to 10 files can be selected to send at once.
Example
If you wish to send the list L1, matrices mat A and mat B and
graph equation Y2 to the other calculator.
1. Prepare the receiving calculator by pressing @ p
D 2.
2. Press @ p D
1 on the sending
calculator.
The send menu will appear.
3. Press 0 1.
A list of all the data stored will be are displayed and the cursor
positioned on the top line.
•You can also select 02 List for “L1”, 03 Matrix for “mat A”
and “mat B”, and 04 Graph Eqn for “Y2”, for example, and
send the data category by category.
4. Move the cursor to L1 and
press E.
A “mark will flash to the
left of “L1”, indicating that
the item has been selected
to be sent.
Press E again to deselect.
5. Select the other files you wish to send in the same manner.
6. Press @ E to start transmission.
227
Chapter 14: OPTION Menu
The optional kit CE-LK2 (cable and Windows software) is
required for calculator to data communication with PC.
Refer to the CE-LK2 operation manual for details.
During communications between calculator and PC, no opera-
tion of the calculator is required. Just connect the cable and
press the power on key, and the entire operation can be
controlled from the PC.
5. Reset function
If a problem occurs after replacing batteries, or the calculator does not function
correctly, use the RESET option.
1. Press @ p E.
2. Press 1 to return the
calculator’s SETUP and
FORMAT settings to the
default value, or 2 to
delete all the stored data.
See “Resetting the Calculator” on page 29 for details.
Transmission
between the EL-
9900 and PC
228
Appendix
1. Replacing Batteries
The calculator uses two different kinds of batteries: manganese (AAA) for unit
operation, and lithium (CR2032) for memory backup.
Compatible battery types
Type (use) Model Quantity
Manganese battery AAA 4
(for unit operation)
Lithium battery CR2032 1
(for memory backup)
*To prevent loss of stored data, DO NOT remove both the unit operation and
memory backup batteries at the same time.
Fluid from a leaking battery accidentally entering an eye could
result in serious injury. Should this occur, wash with clean water
and immediately consult a doctor.
Should fluid from a leaking battery come into contact with your
skin or clothes, immediately wash with clean water.
If the product is not to be used for some time, to avoid damage
to the unit from leaking batteries, remove them and store in a
safe place.
Do not leave exhausted batteries inside the product.
Do not fit partially used batteries, and be sure not to mix
different batteries types.
•Keep batteries out of the reach of children.
Do not allow batteries to become completely exhausted; doing
so may cause the batteries to leak, and may damage the
calculator’s hardware.
Do not throw batteries into a fire or water, as this may cause
them to explode.
Precautions for
handling
batteries
229
Appendix
Once every 5 years, the lithium battery will need to be replaced.
The lithium battery is used to maintain the memory of the
calculator.
Note: Do not remove the lithium battery while the unit operation
batteries are removed; otherwise all the calculator’s stored
memory will be lost.
When battery power becomes
low, a message will show
indicating that a new set of
batteries are needed.
1. Turn off the calculator’s
power (@ o).
2. Turn over the calculator.
Locate the battery compart-
ment cover, and open the
cover as illustrated.
3. Replace all four AAA
batteries as illustrated.
4. Replace the battery com-
partment cover.
5. Press O.
The following message will
appear.
If the message does not
appear, repeat the proce-
dures from step 2.
6. Press O.
Do not press
CC
CC
C. This will clear all the data.
Replacing the
memory backup
battery
Procedures for
replacing unit
operation
batteries
230
Appendix
1. Perform procedures 1 and 2, as shown above. Do not remove
the unit operation batteries.
2. Remove the screw and the
lithium battery cover, as
shown.
3. Use a pen to lift the lithium
battery out of the battery
compartment.
4. Insert the new battery with
the PLUS (
+) side facing up.
5. Replace the lithium battery
cover and fasten the screw.
6. Replace the battery compartment cover and press O.
The following message will appear.
7. Press O.
Do not press
CC
CC
C. This
will clear all the data.
231
Appendix
2. Troubleshooting Guide
Refer to the list of possible symptoms, and solutions may be found here.
The calculator’s power won’t turn on!
The operation batteries may not be installed, may be ex-
hausted, or may be inserted incorrectly. Check the operation
batteries in the battery compartment.
Place the battery cover securely or the calculator will not turn
on.
The saved calculator configurations are not retained!
Both the lithium battery and the operation batteries may need to
be replaced.
The power seems to be on, but the characters and numbers cannot be seen
clearly on the display!
The screen contrast may need to be adjusted.
Press @ p, then press A to enter A CTRST; the
screen contrast can be adjusted by using the + or the
- key.
The calculator won’t take the minus (-) sign; calculation results in a syntax
error!
•To set a negative value, use the _ key instead of the -
key.
The calculation results are very different from what is usually expected!
The angle unit and other configurations may be incorrectly set.
Check the configuration under the @ ;.
The graph cannot be seen!
Check the zoom configuration. Try selecting the automatic zoom
tool, by pressing Z, then A 1.
The graph line may be set differently; check the line configura-
tion under @ d menu.
The calculator may not be set to display graphs. Check the “=”
sign in Y= screen.
232
Appendix
The screen images cannot be stored (SLIDE SHOW)
The available memory may be too small to store the screen
image. Select “B MEMCHK” under @ p menu. Select
and delete unnecessary items under “C DEL.
There appears to be no functions available for integral/differential calculations!
Make sure that the Advanced mode is selected. The integral/
differential calculation tools can be found in the M menu.
Access CATALOG menu by pressing @ j.
The calculator is not responding; the software appears to have crashed!
Press O. If this does not work, then press @, then
O to tell the running application to quit.
If everything fails, then the calculator’s memory may need to be
reset. Resetting the calculator’s memory will clear all the stored
information, such as programs, lists, and variables.
To reset the unit’s memory, open and close the battery compart-
ment cover, and press O to open the verification window. To
prevent data loss, try O first. If it does not work, repeat the
reset operation and press C when prompted.
233
Appendix
3. Specifications
Model EL-9900
Product name Graphing Calculator
Display 132 x 64 dot matrix liquid crystal display
Number of digits: mantissa 10 digits, exponents 2 digits
(standard screen); 7 digit display (including negatives,
decimals) for table screen, split screen, etc.
Mantissa of 10 digits in the complex number mode
Display method: Numerical value, calculation equation input
(direct algebraic logic input / one-line input method), fraction,
and complex number display method specification.
Reversible keyboard Basic and Advanced
Note: Advanced mode specific functions are: financial function,
statistical test function and distribution function, solver
function, matrix function, and tools function, etc.
Calculation method D.A.L. (Direct Algebraic Logic)
Calculation features Manual calculation (arithmetic, parentheses calculation,
memory calculation, function calculation, integral calculation,
coordinate conversion), binary/octal/decimal/hexadecimal
calculation, Boolean operation, matrix calculation, complex
number calculation, complex function calculation, statistic
calculation, regression calculation, statistic authorization
calculation, financial calculation, etc.
Input method Manual key entry
Graphic features Rectangular/polar/parametric/sequence coordinate graph
Graph range specification, graph window mode automatic
specification, graph plotting, trace, calculation function, zoom,
picture input, paint, graph database register split-screen, etc.
Statistic features 1-/2-variable statistical data input/calculation, register, edit
and frequency input, regression calculation function, and
estimated statistic/authorization function, etc.
Solver features Equation solver: numerical syntax analysis, Newton’s method,
graph analysis, and solver equation register.
234
Appendix
List features Direct data entry/edit to list, calculation function for various
lists, and list/matrix conversion.
Substitution features Graph drawing, numerical input from split-screen
Slide Show features Screen image capture, play function
The maximum number of pages to be captured:
Approx. 250 pages (pages equivalent to the Y = X
2
graph
screen)
Program features Condition statement command, subroutine, graph, various
function commands
Option menu Screen contrast adjustment, memory usage check, data
delete, data link (between EL-9900 and PC or another EL-
9900)
Memory size 64 KB (user area: approx. 47.4 KB)
Power supply Operation: 6 V DC...
AAA manganese battery (R03) × 4
Memory backup: 3 V DC...
Lithium battery (CR2032) × 1
Automatic power-off Approx. 10 minutes
Operating temperature range
0 °C to 40 °C (32 °F to 104 °F)
Power consumption 0.23
W
Battery life Operation battery set: approx. 150
hours (with 5 minutes of
continual use and 55 minutes in the display state for every
hour at a temperature of approx. 20 °C/68 °F)
Memory backup: approx. 5 years (at a temperature of approx.
20 °C/68 °F, and when the operation batteries are replaced
frequently)
Note: The life span may differ according to battery brand, type,
usage, and ambient temperature.
External dimensions 86 mm (W)
× 183 mm (D) × 23 mm (H)
3-3/8” (W) × 7-7/32” (D) × 29/32” (H)
Weight 240 g ( 0.53 lb) (with batteries, without the hard cover)
Accessories 4 AAA manganese batteries (included), 1 lithium battery
(installed), operation manual
235
Appendix
4. Error Codes and Error Messages
Error
Code
DescriptionError Message
Syntax Syntax error found in equation/program
Calculate Calculation-related error found (division by 0, calculation
beyond range, etc.)
Nesting Cannot nest more than 14 numerical values, or 32
functions during execution.
Invalid Matrix definition error or entering an invalid value.
Dimension Matrix dimension, or STAT list dimension, inconsistent.
Invalid DIM Size of list/matrix exceeds calculation range.
Argument Inconsistency found in argument of the structured
function.
Data Type Invalid data type used in calculation.
No Sign Change Financial calculation error found.
No define Undefined list/matrix used in calculation.
Domain Argument definition outside of domain.
Increment Increment error found.
Irr Calc More than two inflection points for Irr calculation.
Stat Med Med-Med law (statistic) error found.
No Argument Argument missing.
Not pair dx and dx are not used in a pair.
Not pair [ ] Brackets are not used in a pair.
Not pair ( ) Parentheses are not used in a pair.
Not pair { } Braces are not used in a pair.
Line over Line is over the capacity.
Not delete Unable to delete a selected item.
Buffer over Input/equation exceeds buffer capability.
Editor type Invalid editor type found.*
Continue = “ = ” exists in equation that has been recalled (RCL).
No data Data does not exist.
Graph Type Graph type setting incorrect.
Too many var. Too many variables assigned in the SOLVER.
No variable No variable specified in the SOLVER.
No solution No solution found.
No title No title entered.
01
02
03
04
05
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
16
17
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
236
Appendix
38
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
70
71
90
99
Too many obj More than 30 objects selected.
Lbl duplicate Labels with identical name found in program.
Lbl undefined Goto/Gosub encountered with no defined label.
Lbl over More than 50 labels found in program.
Gosub stack Nesting of more than 10 subroutines found.
Line too long Line contains more than 160 characters.
Can’t return Return used without jumping from subroutine.
Storage full Cannot create more than 99 files.
Coord type Invalid coordinate system for command.
Without For For is missing corresponding to the Next command.
Without WEnd WEnd is missing corresponding to the While command.
Without While While is missing corresponding to the WEnd command.
Without Then Then is missing corresponding to the If command.
Without EndIf EndIf is missing corresponding to the If command.
Without If If is missing corresponding to the EndIf command.
I/O device Communication error found among devices.
Wrong Mode Wrong communication mode set.
Memory over Memory is full; cannot store data as requested.
System error System error found; user memory space is insecure.
Low battery Operation interrupted due to low battery power.
BREAK!! Operation break specified.
Error
Code
DescriptionError Message
* The following operations may cause Editor type error. Correct the Editor type to
continue.
Recall the SOLVER equations (EQTN) or Graph data (G_DATA) stored in a
different EDITOR mode than currently in use.
Receive the Graph equation (Y1 and others) entered in a different EDITOR mode
than currently in use.
237
Appendix
5. Error Conditions Relating to Specific Tasks
1. Financial
* Define constants “r” and “s” as used in the equation below.
r =
S = 1 (Pmt_Begin)
S = 0 (Pmt_End)
(
{}
)
÷ C/Y + 1 1 ,
I (%)
100
C/Y
P/Y
1. I% calculation
1 If PMT = 0
r = 1-
()
1
n
-
PV
FV
2 If PMT 0
f (r) = PV + (1 + r × s) × PMT ×
1
(1
+
r)
-
n
r
+ FV (1 + r)
-
n
: (r 0)
f (r) = PV + PMT × n + FV: (r = 0)
calculate the following for r solved in 1 and 2
I (%) = 100
× C/Y × ((r + 1)
P/Y
C/Y
1)
2. PV calculation
1 If r 0, r >
-1
PV = - (1 + r × s) ×
1
(1
+
r)
-
n
r
× PMT FV × (1 + r)
-
n
2 If r = 0
PV = -n × PMT FV
3 If r -1
Error
238
Appendix
3. FV calculation
1 If r 0, r > -1
1
(1
+
r)
-
n
r
PV
+
(1
+
r
×
s)
×
×
PMT
(1
+
r)
-
n
FV =
2 If r = 0
FV = -n × PMT PV
3 If r -1
Error
4. PMT calculation
1 If r 0, r >
-1
1
(1
+
r)
-
n
r
PMT =
(1
+
r
×
s)
×
PV
+
FV
×
(1
+
r)
-
n
2 If r = 0
PMT =
PV + FV
n
3 If r -1
Error
5. N calculation
1 If r 0, r >
-1
log (1
+
r)
log
N =
1
r
×
(1
+
r
×
s)
×
PMT
FV
1
r
×
(1
+
r
×
s)
×
PMTPV
+
{}
2 If r = 0
N =
FV + PV
PMT
3 If r -1
Error
239
Appendix
Calculation resultXreg
Calculation resultXreg
µ: Mean
σ: Standard
deviation
However: Γ(s) =
0
x
s1
e
-x
dx
2. Error conditions during financial calculations
•r -1
•N = 0 in PMT calculations
I% = 0 and PMT = 0, or I% 0 and FV = (1/r) (1 + r × s) × PMT, in N calculations.
s = 1 (Pmt_Begin)
s = 0 (Pmt_End)
In I% calculations
If PMT > 0:
Pmt_End mode: PV 0 and FV
+ PMT 0
PV < 0 and FV + PMT < 0
Pmt_Begin mode: PV + PMT 0 and FV 0
PV + PMT < 0 and FV < 0
If PMT < 0:
Pmt_End mode: PV > 0 and FV
+ PMT > 0
PV 0 and FV + PMT 0
Pmt_Begin mode: PV + PMT > 0 and FV > 0
PV + PMT 0 and FV 0
If PMT = 0: PV
÷ FV 0
•FV, N
× PMT, PV 0 or FV, N × PMT, PV 0
Irr calculation: all cash flows have the same sign.
3. Distribution function
1 pdfnorm(
1
f (x) = exp ( )
(x µ)
2
2σ
2
2πσ
2 pdfT(
f (x) =
πdf
df
2
x
2
df
df + 1
2
df + 1
2
-
Γ ( )
Γ ( ) (1
+ )
240
Appendix
3 pdfχ
2
(
f (χ
2
, df) =
df
2
2Γ ( )
df
2
1
χ
2
2
e
(- )
χ
2
2
( )
1
4 pdfF(
f (x) = ( )
m
2
m
+
n
2
m
+
n
2
Γ ( )
n
2
Γ ( )
Γ ( )
m
n
(1
+
)
mx
n
x
1
m
2
m
2
-
5 pdfbin(
P (x = 0) = (1 p)
n
P (x = c
+
1) =
P (x = c)
(n
c) p
(c
+
1)(1
p)
(c = 0, 1, ..., n 1)
6 pdfpoi(
f (x) =
e
-
µ
µ
x
x!
(x = 0, 1, 2, ...)
7 pdfgeo(
f (x) = p (1 p)
x
-
1
df: Degree of freedom
m: Degree of freedom of
numerator
n: Degree of freedom of
denominator
n: Trial number (integers
greater than 0)
p: Success probability
(0 p 1)
c: Success number
x: First successful trial number
However: Γ(s) =
0
x
s
1
e
-
x
dx
However: Γ(s) =
0
x
s1
e
-x
dx
241
Appendix
6. Calculation Range
1. Arithmetic calculation
The results for dividend, multiplicand and operand are:
-1 × 10
100
< x -1 × 10
-
99
, 1 × 10
-
99
< x 1 × 10
100
or x = 0
(valid within the range of display capability)
Note: Calculation results and input values less than 1 × 10
-
99
are
considered equal to 0.
2. Function calculation
Calculation accuracy
In principle, calculation errors are ±1 of the last digit. (In case of exponential
display, the calculation errors are ±1 of the last digit of the mantissa display.)
However, a calculation error increases in continuous calculations due to
accumulation of each calculation error. (This is the same for a
b
,
b
a
, n!, e
x
, In, etc.
where continuous calculations are performed internally.)
Additionally, a calculation error will accumulate and become larger in the
vicinity of inflection points and singular points of functions. (for example,
calculating sinh X or tanh X at X = 0)
Function Calculation range Notes
sin x
cos x
tan x
sin
-
1
x
cos
-
1
x
tan
-
1
x
sinh x
cosh x
tanh x
sinh
-
1
x
cosh
-
1
x
tanh
-
1
x
DEG : |x| < 1 × 10
10
RAD : |x| <
π
180
× 10
10
GRAD : |x| <
10
9
× 10
10
However, the following are excluded for tan x
DEG : |x| = 90 (2n 1)
RAD : |x| =
π
2
(2n 1)
GRAD : |x| = 100 (2n 1)
-1 x 1
|x| < 1 × 10
100
-230.2585093 x 230.2585092
|x| < 1 × 10
50
1 x 1 × 10
50
|x| < 1
“n” is an integer
242
Appendix
ln x
log x
e
x
10
x
x
-
1
x
2
x
n!
a
b
(^)
b
a
nPr
nCr
dec
bin
oct
hex
Function Calculation range Notes
ln x = log
e
x
e
.
=
.
2.71828...
x 0
n is an integer or
integer
+ 0.5
a
b
= 10
b·log a
b
a
= 10
1
a
log b
n and r are positive
integers
x is an integer
1
× 10
-
99
x < 1 × 10
100
-1 × 10
100
< x 230.2585092
-1 × 10
100
< x < 100
|x| < 1 × 10
100
|x| < 1 × 10
50
0 x < 1 × 10
100
-0.5 n 69.5
When a > 0:
-1 × 10
100
< b log a < 100
When a = 0:
0 < b < 1 × 10
100
When a < 0:
b is an integer, or
1
b
is an odd number (b 0)
However, -1 × 10
100
< b log |a| < 100
When b > 0:
-1 × 10
100
<
1
a
log b < 100, a 0
When b = 0:
0 < a < 1 × 10
100
When b < 0:
a is an odd number, or
1
a
is an integer (a 0)
However,
-1 × 10
100
<
1
a
log |b| < 100
0 r n 69
Decimal: |x| 9999999999
Binary: 1000000000000000 x
1111111111111111
0 x 0111111111111111
Octal: 4000000000 x 7777777777
0 x 3777777777
Hexadecimal: FDABF41C01 x FFFFFFFFFF
0 x 2540BE3FF
243
Appendix
Function Calculation range Notes
dms
deg
xy r
xy θ
rθ x
rθ y
not
neg
Statistic
calcula-
tions
r =
x
2
+
y
2
θ = tan
-
1
y
x
x = r cosθ
y = r sinθ
The range of θ is
the same as x of
sin x and cos x
Other Boolean
operations are the
same as not and
neg
|x| < 1
× 10
100
|x| < 1 × 10
100
, |y| < 1 × 10
100
x
2
+
y
2
< 1 × 10
100
|
y
x
| < 1 × 10
100
|r| < 1 × 10
100
Binary: 1000000000000000 x
1111111111111111
0 x 0111111111111111
Octal: 4000000000 x 7777777777
0 x 3777777777
Hexadecimal: FDABF41C01 x FFFFFFFFFF
0 x 2540BE3FE
Binary: 1000000000000001 x
1111111111111111
0 x 0111111111111111
Octal: 4000000001 x 7777777777
0 x 3777777777
Hexadecimal: FDABF41C01 x FFFFFFFFFF
0 x 2540BE3FF
|x| < 1
× 10
50
|y| < 1 × 10
50
|Σx| < 1 × 10
100
Σx
2
< 1 × 10
100
|Σy| < 1 × 10
100
Σy
2
< 1 × 10
100
|Σxy| < 1 × 10
100
|n| < 1 × 10
100
244
Appendix
Function Calculation range Notes
x
_
sx
σx
r
b
a
y’
x’
Same for y
_
, sy and
σy
Regression calcula-
tions excluding 2nd,
3rd, and 4th degree
polynomials.
Same as above.
Same as b for other.
n 0
n > 1
|Σx| < 1
× 10
50
0
(Σx)
2
n
Σx
2
n
1
< 1 × 10
100
n > 0
|Σx| < 1 × 10
50
0
(Σx)
2
n
Σx
2
n
< 1 × 10
100
n > 0
|Σx| < 1 × 10
50
|Σy| < 1 × 10
50
0 < (Σx
2
(Σx)
2
n
) (Σy
2
(Σy)
2
n
) <1 × 10
100
|Σxy
ΣxΣy
n
| < 1 × 10
100
< 1 × 10
100
n > 0
|Σx| < 1
× 10
50
|(Σx) (Σy)| < 1 × 10
100
0 < |Σx
2
(Σx)
2
n
| < 1 × 10
100
|Σxy
ΣxΣy
n
| < 1 × 10
100
< 1 × 10
100
|bx
_
| < 1 × 10
100
|y
_
bx
_
| < 1 × 10
100
|bx| < 1 × 10
100
|a + bx| < 1 × 10
100
|y a| < 1 × 10
100
|
y a
b
| < 1 × 10
100
245
Appendix
3. Complex number calculation
In a complex number calculation, a calculation error may occur and increase due to
inner continuous calculations.
Function Calculation range Notes
int÷
remain
%
a b/c
b/c
List
Matrix
This is the same
when the result of a
list function speci-
fies 1000 or more
elements.
0 x < 10
10
0 x < 10
10
|x| < 10
100
|x| < 10
10
Error is returned when the number of elements
exceeds 1000.
Error is returned when specifying columns or rows
that exceed 100.
Function Calculation range Notes
1
x + yi
(x + yi)
2
In (x + yi)
log (x + yi)
x
+
yi
e
(x
+
yi)
10
(x
+
yi)
(x + yi)
(a
+
bi)
x + yi 0
|x| < 10
50
|y| < 10
50
|x| < 10
50
|y| < 10
50
|xy| < 5 × 10
99
|x| < 10
50
|y| < 10
50
|
y
x
| < 10
100
|x| < 230
|y| < 230
|x| < 100
|y| < 100
|x| < 10
50
|y| < 10
50
|a| < 10
100
|b| < 10
100
A number with 10 or
less decimal places,
or the 10
10
-th or
above decimal
places are 0.
246
Appendix
7. CATALOG Feature
Press @ j to display the CATALOG menu.
You can directly access various features and commands from the CATALOG menu.
CATALOG menu lists are different between the Basic mode and the Advanced mode.
For example, in Program edit mode of the Advanced mode, you can access the
program commands from the CATALOG menu.
Please note that you can enter the eular number “
eonly from the CATALOG menu.
The Basic mode features and commands accessible only from the CATALOG menu
are:
and, ANOVA(, cos
–1
, cosh, cosh
–1
, cot, cot
–1
, csc, csc
–1
, cumul, d/dx(, dx, e, e
x
,
fmax(, fmin(, Inflec, ln, log2, not, or, prod(, Rg_a+bx, Rg_ae
bx
, Rg_ax
b
, Rg_ln,
Rg_log, Rg_logistic, Rg_sin, Rg_x
3
, Rg_x
4
, sec, sec
–1
, sin
–1
, sinh, sinh
–1
, tan
–1
,
tanh, tanh
–1
, xnor, xor, [, ], :, =, , >, , <, , 2
x
, Σ(, .
The Advanced mode features and commands accessible only from the CATALOG
menu are:
a b/c, A.xxx, b/c, e, int÷, remain, rndCoin, rndDice, Simp, %.
The CATALOG commands and the equivalent keys:
CATAROG command Equivalent key
¬
b
^ a
2
y
-
1
x
R
C M C nCr
P M C nPr
d
247
Appendix
8. List of Menu/Sub-menu Items
CATALOG function lets you access almost all the functions and commands.
Square brackets indicate that the value or variable is optional.
1. MATH menus
Functions
Commands
Syntax
Keystrokes
Page
Advanced mode Basic mode
MM
MM
CALC
log
2
log
2
value
A 0 1
70
2
X
2
value
A 0 2
71
fmin( fmin(
equation, lower limit of x, upper limit of x
)
A 0 3
71
fmax( fmax(
equation, lower limit of x, upper limit of x
)
A 0 4
71
d/dx( d/dx(
equation, value of x [, tolerance]
)
A 0 5
71
∫∫
equation, lower limit, upper limit [, tolerance]
dx
A 0 6
71
dx
equation, lower limit, upper limit [, tolerance]
dx
A 0 7
71
(
(
expression, initial value, end value [, increment]
)
A 0 8
72
sec sec
value
A 0 9
72
csc csc
value
A 1 0
72
cot cot
value
A 1 1
72
sec
–1
sec
–1
value
A 1 2
72
csc
–1
csc
–1
value
A 1 3
72
cot
–1
cot
–1
value
A 1 4
72
sinh sinh
value
A 1 5
72
cosh cosh
value
A 1 6
72
tanh tanh
value
A 1 7
72
sinh
–1
sinh
–1
value
A 1 8
73
cosh
–1
cosh
–1
value
A 1 9
73
tanh
–1
tanh
–1
value
A 2 0
73
sin sin
value
A 1
42
cos cos
value
A 2
42
tan tan
value
A 3
43
log log
value
A 4
43
10
x
10
value
A 5
43
248
Appendix
MM
MM
NUM
abs( abs(
value
)
B 1 B 1
73/43
round( round(
value [, digit number of decimals]
)
B 2 B 2
73/44
ipart ipart
value
B 3 B 3
73/44
fpart fpart
value
B 4 B 4
73/44
int int
value
B 5 B 5
73/44
min( min(
value A, value B
) or min(
list
)
B 6 B 6
73/45
max( max(
value A, value B
) or max(
list
)
B 7 B 7
73/45
lcm( lcm(
natural number, natural number
)
B 8 B 8
73/45
gcd( gcd(
natural number, natural number
)
B 9 B 9
73/45
remain
natural number
remain
natural number
B 0
46
MM
MM
PROB
random random
[(number of trial)]
C 1 C 1
74/46
rndInt(
rndInt(
minimum value, maximum value [, number of
trial]
)
C 2 C 2
74/46
rndCoin rndCoin
[(number of trial)]
C 3
47
rndDice rndDice
[(number of trial)]
C 4
47
nPr
value A
nPr
value B
C 3 C 5
74/47
nCr
value A
nCr
value B
C 4 C 6
74/48
!
value
!
C 5 C 7
74/48
MM
MM
CONV
deg
value
deg
D 1 D 1
74/48
dms
value
dms
D 2 D 2
74/49
xyr( xyr(
x-coordinate, y-coordinate
)
D 3
75
xy
θ
(xy
θ
(
x-coordinate, y-coordinate
)
D 4
75
r
θ
x( r
θ
x(
r-coordinate,
θ
-coordinate
)
D 5
75
r
θ
y( r
θ
y(
r-coordinate,
θ
-coordinate
)
D 6
75
MM
MM
ANGLE
°
value
° [
value
value
"]
E 1 E 1
76/49
value
°
value
’ [
value
"]
E 2 E 2
76/49
"
value
°
value
value
"
Print "
character strings
["]
E 3 E 3
76/49
r
value
r
E 4 E 4
76/49
Functions
Commands
Syntax
Keystrokes
Page
Advanced mode Basic mode
249
Appendix
2. LIST menus
g
value
g
E 5
76
MM
MM
INEQ
=
value A
=
value B
F 1
76
value A
value B
F 2
76
>
value A
>
value B
F 3
76
value A
value B
F 4
76
<
value A
<
value B
F 5
76
value A
value B
F 6
76
MM
MM
LOGIC
and
value A
and
value B
G 1
77
or
value A
or
value B
G 2
77
not not
value
G 3
77
xor
value A
xor
value B
G 4
78
xnor
value A
xnor
value B
G 5
78
MM
MM
COMPLEX
conj( conj(
complex number
)
H 1
78
real( real(
complex number
)
H 2
79
image( image(
complex number
)
H 3
79
abs( abs(
complex number
)
H 4
79
arg( arg(
complex number
)
H 5
79
MM
MM
(in the N-base calculation mode) LOGIC
and
value A
and
value B
A 1
77
or
value A
or
value B
A 2
77
not not
value
A 3
77
neg neg
value
A 4
78
xor
value A
xor
value B
A 5
78
xnor
value A
xnor
value B
A 6
78
Functions
Commands
Syntax
Keystrokes
Page
Advanced mode Basic mode
@@
@@
ll
ll
OPE/NAME
L1 No arguments
A 1
132
Functions
Commands
Syntax
Keystrokes
Page
Advanced mode Basic mode
250
Appendix
L2 No arguments
A 2
132
L3 No arguments
A 3
132
L4 No arguments
A 4
132
L5 No arguments
A 5
132
L6 No arguments
A 6
132
sortA(
sortA(
list name [, subordinate list name1, ... ,
subordinate list name n]
)
A 1 B 1
135
sortD(
sortD(
list name [, subordinate list name1,
...
,
subordinate list name n]
)
A 2 B 2
135
dim( dim(
list
)
A 3 B 3
136
fill( fill(
value, list
)
A 4 B 4
136
seq( seq(
equation, start value, end value [, increment]
)
A 5 B 5
137
cumul cumul
list
A 6
137
df_list df_list
list
A 7 B 6
137
augment( augment(
list 1, list 2
)
A 8 B 7
138
list
mat( list
mat(
list 1, ... , list n, matrix name
)
A 9
138
mat
list(
mat
list(
matrix name, list name1, ... , list name n
)
mat
list(
matrix name, column number, list name
)
A 0
138
@@
@@
ll
ll
MATH
min(
min(
value A, value B
) or
min(
list
)
B 1 C 1
139
max(
max(
value A, value B
) or
max(
list
)
B 2 C 2
139
mean( mean(
list [, frequency list]
)
B 3 C 3
139
median( median(
list [, frequency list]
)
B 4 C 4
140
sum( sum(
list [, start number, end number]
)
B 5 C 5
140
prod( prod(
list [, start number, end number]
)
B 6
140
stdDv( stdDv(
list [, frequency list]
)
B 7 C 6
141
varian( varian(
list [, frequency list]
)
B 8 C 7
141
@@
@@
ll
ll
L_DATA
StoLD StoLD
natural number
C 1 D 1
142
RclLD RclLD
natural number
C 2 D 2
143
* “list” in the above table means a list or a list name.
Functions
Commands
Syntax
Keystrokes
Page
Advanced mode Basic mode
251
Appendix
3. STAT menus
@@
@@
ll
ll
{ }
{ No arguments
E 1
132
} No arguments
E 2
132
Functions
Commands
Syntax
Keystrokes
Page
Advanced mode Basic mode
SS
SS
EDIT/OPE
EDIT No arguments
A E A E
149
sortA(
sortA(
list [, subordinate list 1, ... , subordinate list n]
)
B 1 B 1
159
sortD(
sortD(
list [, subordinate list 1, ... , subordinate list n]
)
B 2 B 2
159
SetList SetList
[list name 1, list name 2, list name 3, ... ]
B 3 B 3
159
ClrList ClrList
list name1 [, list name 2, ... ]
B 4 B 4
159
SS
SS
CALC
1_Stats 1_Stats
[x list name [, frequency list]]
C 1 C 1
150
2_Stats 2_Stats
[x list name, y list name [, frequency list]]
C 2 C 2
150
ANOVA( ANOVA(
list name 1, list name 2 [, ... ]
)
C 3
152
SS
SS
REG
Med_Med
Med_Med (
list name for x, list name for y
[, frequency list
] [
, equation name to store]
)
D 0 1 D 1
160
Rg_ax+b
Rg_ax+b (
list name for x, list name for y
[, frequency list
] [
, equation name to store]
)
D 0 2 D 2
160
Rg_a+bx
Rg_a+bx (
list name for x, list name for y
[, frequency list
] [
, equation name to store]
)
D 0 3
160
Rg_x
2
Rg_x
2
(
list name for x, list name for y
[, frequency list
] [
, equation name to store]
)
D 0 4 D 3
160
Rg_x
3
Rg_x
3
(list name for x, list name for y
[, frequency list
] [
, equation name to store]
)
D 0 5
160
Rg_x
4
Rg_x
4
(
list name for x, list name for y
[, frequency list
] [
, equation name to store]
)
D 0 6
161
Rg_ln
Rg_ln
(list name for x, list name for y
[, frequency list
] [
, equation name to store]
)
D 0 7
161
Rg_log
Rg_log (
list name for x, list name for y
[, frequency list
] [
, equation name to store]
)
D 0 8
161
* “list” in the above table means a list or a list name.
Functions
Commands
Syntax
Keystrokes
Page
Advanced mode Basic mode
252
Appendix
Rg_ab
x
Rg_ab
x
(
list name for x, list name for y
[, frequency list
] [
, equation name to store]
)
D 0 9 D 4
161
Rg_ae
bx
Rg_ae
bx
(
list name for x, list name for y
[, frequency list
] [
, equation name to store]
)
D 1 0
161
Rg_x
-1
Rg_x
-1
(
list name for x, list name for y
[, frequency list
] [
, equation name to store]
)
D 1 1 D 5
162
Rg_ax
b
Rg_ax
b
(
list name for x, list name for y
[, frequency list
] [
, equation name to store]
)
D 1 2
162
Rg_logistic
Rg_logistic
(list name for x, list name for y
[, frequency list
] [
, equation name to store]
)
D 1 3
162
Rg_sin
Rg_sin (
[iterations,] list name for x, list name for y
[, frequency list
] [
, period
] [
, equation name to
store]
)
D 1 4
162
x'
value or list
x'
D 1 5 D 6
163
y'
value or list
y'
D 1 6 D 7
163
SS
SS
TEST
χ
2
test No arguments
E 0 1
166
Ftest2samp No arguments
E 0 2
167
Ttest1samp No arguments
E 0 3
167
Ttest2samp No arguments
E 0 4
168
TtestLinreg No arguments
E 0 5
169
Tint1samp No arguments
E 0 6
170
Tint2samp No arguments
E 0 7
170
Ztest1samp No arguments
E 0 8
171
Ztest2samp No arguments
E 0 9
172
Ztest1prop No arguments
E 1 0
173
Ztest2prop No arguments
E 1 1
173
Zint1samp No arguments
E 1 2
174
Zint2samp No arguments
E 1 3
175
Zint1prop No arguments
E 1 4
175
Zint2prop No arguments
E 1 5
176
InputList No arguments
E 1 6
166
InputStats No arguments
E 1 7
166
SS
SS
DISTRI
pdfnorm( pdfnorm(
value [, mean, standard deviation]
)
F 0 1
177
Functions
Commands
Syntax
Keystrokes
Page
Advanced mode Basic mode
253
Appendix
4. STAT PLOT menus
cdfnorm(
cdfnorm(
lower limit, upper limit [,mean, standard
deviation]
)
F 0 2
177
InvNorm( InvNorm(
probability [, mean, standard deviation]
)
F 0 3
178
pdfT( pdfT(
value, degree of freedom
)
F 0 4
178
cdfT( cdfT(
lower limit, upper limit, degree of freedom
)
F 0 5
179
pdfχ
2
( pdfχ
2
(
value, degree of freedom
)
F 0 6
179
cdfχ
2
( cdfχ
2
(
lower limit, upper limit, degree of freedom
)
F 0 7
179
pdfF(
pdfF(
value, degree of freedom of numerator,
degree of freedom of denominator
)
F 0 8
180
cdfF(
cdfF(
lower limit, upper limit, degree of freedom of
numerator, degree of freedom of denominator
)
F 0 9
180
pdfbin(
pdfbin(
number of trial, success probability
[, success numbers]
)
F 1 0
181
cdfbin(
cdfbin(
number of trial, success probability
[, success numbers]
)
F 1 1
181
pdfpoi( pdfpoi(
mean, value
)
F 1 2
181
cdfpoi( cdfpoi(
mean, value
)
F 1 3
182
pdfgeo( pdfgeo(
success probability, value
)
F 1 4
182
cdfgeo( cdfgeo(
success probability, value
)
F 1 5
182
Functions
Commands
Syntax
Keystrokes
Page
Advanced mode Basic mode
[[
[[
PLOT1/PLOT2/PLOT3/LIMIT/ON/OFF
PLOT1 No arguments
A E A E
157
PLOT2 No arguments
B E B E
157
PLOT3 No arguments
C E C E
157
SET No arguments
D 1 D 1
157
LimON No arguments
D 2 D 2
157
LimOFF No arguments
D 3 D 3
157
PlotON PlotON [number]
E 1 E 1
158
PlotOFF PlotOFF [number]
E 2 E 2
158
[[
[[
(in STAT PLOT mode) HIST/B.L./N.P./N.D./BOX/PIE/S.D./XYLINE
Hist No arguments
A 1 A 1
153
Broken • No arguments
B 1 B 1
154
Functions
Commands
Syntax
Keystrokes
Page
Advanced mode Basic mode
254
Appendix
5. DRAW menus
Broken + No arguments
B 2 B 2
154
Broken No arguments
B 3 B 3
154
Norm •_X No arguments
C 1 C 1
154
Norm+_X No arguments
C 2 C 2
154
Norm _X No arguments
C 3 C 3
154
Norm •_Y No arguments
C 4 C 4
154
Norm+_Y No arguments
C 5 C 5
154
Norm _Y No arguments
C 6 C 6
154
NormDis No arguments
D 1 D 1
154
Box No arguments
E 1 E 1
155
MBox • No arguments
E 2 E 2
155
MBox+ No arguments
E 3 E 3
155
MBox No arguments
E 4 E 4
155
Pie No arguments
F 1 F 1
156
Pie% No arguments
F 2 F 2
156
Scattr • No arguments
G 1 G 1
156
Scattr+ No arguments
G 2 G 2
156
Scattr No arguments
G 3 G 3
156
xyLine• No arguments
H 1 H 1
156
xyLine+ No arguments
H 2 H 2
156
xyLine No arguments
H 3 H 3
156
Functions
Commands
Syntax
Keystrokes
Page
Advanced mode Basic mode
@@
@@
dd
dd
DRAW
ClrDraw No arguments
A 1 A 1
102
Line(
Line(
x-coordinate of start point, y-coordinate of
start point, x-coordinate of end point,
y-coordinate of end point [,0]
)
A 2 A 2
103
H_line H_line
y-value
A 3 A 3
105
V_line V_line
x-value
A 4 A 4
105
T_line( T_line(
equation, x-value
)
A 5 A 5
106
Functions
Commands
Syntax
Keystrokes
Page
Advanced mode Basic mode
255
Appendix
6. ZOOM menus
Draw Draw
equation
A 6 A 6
107
Shade( Shade(
equation 1, equation 2 [, begin, end]
)
A 7 A 7
107
DrawInvDrawInv
equation
A 8 A 8
108
Circle(
Circle(
x-coordinate of center, y-coordinate of cen-
ter, radius
)
A 9 A 9
108
Tex t( Text(
column, row,
"
character strings
")
A 0 A 0
109
@@
@@
dd
dd
POINT
PntON( PntON(
x-coordinate, y-coordinate)
B 1 B 1
110
PntOFF( PntOFF(
x-coordinate, y-coordinate)
B 2 B 2
110
PntCHG( PntCHG(
x-coordinate, y-coordinate
)
B 3 B 3
110
PxlON( PxlON(
column, row
)
B 4 B 4
110
PxlOFF( PxlOFF(
column, row
)
B 5 B 5
110
PxlCHG( PxlCHG(
column, row
)
B 6 B 6
110
PxlTST( PxlTST(
column, row
)
B 7 B 7
111
@@
@@
dd
dd
ON/OFF/LINE/G_DATA/PICT/SHADE
DrawON
DrawON [
equation number 1, equation number 2,
…]
C 1 C 1
111
DrawOFF
DrawOFF [
equation number 1, equation number 2,
…]
C 2 C 2
111
LINE No arguments
D E D E
112
StoGD StoGD
number
E 1 E 1
112
RclGD RclGD
number
E 2 E 2
112
StoPict StoPict
number
F 1 F 1
113
RclPict RclPict
number
F 2 F 2
113
SET No arguments
G 1 G 1
114
INITIAL No arguments
G 2 G 2
114
Functions
Commands
Syntax
Keystrokes
Page
Advanced mode Basic mode
ZZ
ZZ
ZOOM
Auto
Zm_Auto
No arguments
A 1 A 1
53
Box
Zm_Box
No arguments
A 2 A 2
54
Functions
Commands
Syntax
Keystrokes
Page
Advanced mode Basic mode
256
Appendix
In
Zm_In
No arguments
A 3 A 3
54
Out
Zm_Out
No arguments
A 4 A 4
54
Default
Zm_Default
No arguments
A 5 A 5
54
Square
Zm_Square
No arguments
A 6 A 6
54
Dec
Zm_Dec
No arguments
A 7 A 7
54
Int
Zm_Int
No arguments
A 8 A 8
54
Stat
Zm_Stat
No arguments
A 9 A 9
54
ZZ
ZZ
FACTOR/POWER
FACTOR No arguments
B E B E
55
x
2
_
Zm_x
2
No arguments
C 1 C 1
55
x
-1
Zm_x
-1
No arguments
C 2 C 2
55
Zm_
No arguments
C 3 C 3
55
ZZ
ZZ
EXP
10
x
Zm_10
x
No arguments
D 1 D 1
55
e
x
Zm_e
x
No arguments
D 2
97
log x
Zm_log
No arguments
D 3 D 2
55
ln x
Zm_ln
No arguments
D 4
97
ZZ
ZZ
TRIG
sin x
Zm_sin
No arguments
E 1 E 1
56
cos x
Zm_cos
No arguments
E 2 E 2
56
tan x
Zm_tan
No arguments
E 3 E 3
56
Functions
Commands
Syntax
Keystrokes
Page
Advanced mode Basic mode
x
x
257
Appendix
7. CALC menus
sin
-1
x
Zm_sin
-1
No arguments
E 4
97
cos
-1
x
Zm_cos
-1
No arguments
E 5
97
tan
-1
x
Zm_tan
-1
No arguments
E 6
97
ZZ
ZZ
HYP/STO/RCL
sinh x
Zm_sinh
No arguments
F 1
97
cosh x
Zm_cosh
No arguments
F 2
97
tanh x
Zm_tanh
No arguments
F 3
97
sinh
-1
x
Zm_sinh
-1
No arguments
F 4
97
cosh
-1
x
Zm_cosh
-1
No arguments
F 5
97
tanh
-1
x
Zm_tanh
-1
No arguments
F 6
97
StoWin No arguments
G 1 F 1
56
RclWin No arguments
H 1 G 1
56
PreWin No arguments
H 2 G 2
56
Functions
Commands
Syntax
Keystrokes
Page
Advanced mode Basic mode
@@
@@
kk
kk
CALC
Value Value
x
A 1 A 1
60
Intsct No arguments
A 2 A 2
60
Minimum No arguments
A 3 A 3
60
Maximum No arguments
A 4 A 4
61
X_Incpt No arguments
A 5 A 5
61
Y_Incpt No arguments
A 6 A 6
61
Inflec No arguments
A 7
94
Functions
Commands
Syntax
Keystrokes
Page
Advanced mode Basic mode
258
Appendix
8. SLIDE SHOW menus
9. PRGM menus
Functions
Commands
Syntax
Keystrokes
Page
Advanced mode Basic mode
]]
]]
CURR/PLAY/NEW/SELECT/EDIT
CURR No arguments
A E A E
118
PLAY No arguments
BB
118
NEW No arguments
C E C E
118
SELECT No arguments
DD
118
MOVE No arguments
E 1 E 1
118
DEL No arguments
E 2 E 2
119
RENAME No arguments
E 3 E 3
119
Functions
Commands
Syntax
Keystrokes
Page
Advanced mode Basic mode
PP
PP
EXEC No arguments
AA
202
EDIT No arguments
B
202
NEW No arguments
C E
202
PP
PP
(in the Prgramming mode) PRGM
Print
Print
variable
Print "
character strings
["]
A 1
207
""
characters
["]
A 2
207
Input Input
["prompt strings", ] variable
A 3
207
Wait Wait [
natural number
]
A 4
208
Rem Rem
comments
A 5
208
End No arguments
A 6
208
Key Key
variable
A 7
208
PP
PP
(in the Prgramming mode) BRNCH
Label Label
label name
B 0 1
214
Goto Goto
label name
B 0 2
214
If If
conditional statements
Then
commands
[Else
commands
]
EndIf
B 0 3
214
Then
B 0 4
214
Else
B 0 5
214
EndIf
B 0 6
214
259
Appendix
For For
variable, start value, end value [, increment]
commands
Next
B 0 7
215
Next
B 0 8
215
While While
conditional statements
commands
WEnd
B 0 9
215
WEnd
B 1 0
215
Gosub Gosub
label name
B 1 1
216
Return No arguments
B 1 2
216
PP
PP
(in the Prgramming mode) SCRN
ClrT No arguments
C 1
209
ClrG No arguments
C 2
209
DispT No arguments
C 3
209
DispG No arguments
C 4
209
PP
PP
(in the Prgramming mode) I/O
Get Get
variable
D 1
209
Send Send
variable
D 2
209
PP
PP
(in the Prgramming mode) SETUP
Rect No arguments
E 0 1
210
Param No arguments
E 0 2
210
Polar No arguments
E 0 3
210
Web No arguments
E 0 4
210
Time No arguments
E 0 5
210
uv No arguments
E 0 6
210
uw No arguments
E 0 7
210
vw No arguments
E 0 8
210
Deg No arguments
E 0 9
210
Rad No arguments
E 1 0
210
Grad No arguments
E 1 1
210
FloatPt No arguments
E 1 2
211
Fix No arguments
E 1 3
211
Sci No arguments
E 1 4
211
Eng No arguments
E 1 5
211
Tab Tab
integer
E 1 6
211
Functions
Commands
Syntax
Keystrokes
Page
Advanced mode Basic mode
260
Appendix
Decimal No arguments
E 1 7
211
Mixed No arguments
E 1 8
211
Improp No arguments
E 1 9
211
x ± yi No arguments
E 2 0
211
r ∠ θ No arguments
E 2 1
211
PP
PP
(in the Prgramming mode) FORMAT
RectCursor No arguments
F 0 1
211
PolarCursor No arguments
F 0 2
211
ExprON No arguments
F 0 3
211
ExprOFF No arguments
F 0 4
211
Y'ON No arguments
F 0 5
211
Y'OFF No arguments
F 0 6
211
AxisON No arguments
F 0 7
212
AxisOFF No arguments
F 0 8
212
GridON No arguments
F 0 9
212
GridOFF No arguments
F 1 0
212
Connect No arguments
F 1 1
212
Dot No arguments
F 1 2
212
Sequen No arguments
F 1 3
212
Simul No arguments
F 1 4
212
PP
PP
(in the Prgramming mode) S_PLOT
Plt1(
Plt1(
graph type, X list name [, Y list name,
frequency list]
)
G 1
213
Plt2(
Plt2(
graph type, X list name [, Y list name,
frequency list]
)
G 2
213
Plt3(
Plt3(
graph type, X list name [, Y list name,
frequency list]
)
G 3
213
PlotON PlotON [
number
]
G 4
213
PlotOFF PlotOFF [
number
]
G 5
213
LimON No arguments
G 6
213
LimOFF No arguments
G 7
213
Functions
Commands
Syntax
Keystrokes
Page
Advanced mode Basic mode
261
Appendix
10. MATRIX menus
PP
PP
(in the Prgramming mode) COPY
StoLine No arguments
H 1
216
RclLine No arguments
H 2
217
Functions
Commands
Syntax
Keystrokes
Page
Advanced mode Basic mode
@@
@@
mm
mm
NAME
mat A No arguments
A 1
130
mat B No arguments
A 2
130
mat C No arguments
A 3
130
mat D No arguments
A 4
130
mat E No arguments
A 5
130
mat F No arguments
A 6
130
mat G No arguments
A 7
130
mat H No arguments
A 8
130
mat I No arguments
A 9
130
mat J No arguments
A 0
130
@@
@@
mm
mm
EDIT
mat A No arguments
B 1
122
mat B No arguments
B 2
122
mat C No arguments
B 3
122
mat D No arguments
B 4
122
mat E No arguments
B 5
122
mat F No arguments
B 6
122
mat G No arguments
B 7
122
mat H No arguments
B 8
122
mat I No arguments
B 9
122
mat J No arguments
B 0
122
@@
@@
mm
mm
OPE
dim( dim(
matrix name
)
C 0 1
125
fill( fill(
value, matrix name
)
C 0 2
125
cumul cumul
matrix name
C 0 3
126
Functions
Commands
Syntax
Keystrokes
Page
Advanced mode Basic mode
262
Appendix
11. FINANCE menus
augment( augment(
matrix name A, matrix name B
)
C 0 4
126
identity identity
dimension value
C 0 5
126
rnd_mat( rnd_mat(
number of row, number of column
)
C 0 6
126
row_swap( row_swap(
matrix name, row number, row number
)
C 0 7
127
row_plus( row_plus(
matrix name, row number, row number
)
C 0 8
127
row_mult(
row_mult(
multiplied number, matrix name, row
number
)
C 0 9
127
row_m.p.(
row_m.p.(
multiplied number, matrix name, row
number, row number
)
C 1 0
127
matlist(
matlist(
matrix name, list name 1, …, list name n
)
matlist(
matrix name, column number, list name
)
C 1 1
128
listmat( listmat(
list 1, …, list n, matrix name
)
C 1 2
128
@@
@@
mm
mm
MATH/[ ]
det det
matrix name
D 1
129
trans trans
matrix name
D 2
129
rowEF rowEF
matrix name
D 3
129
rrowEF rrowEF
matrix name
D 4
129
[ No arguments
E 1
130
] No arguments
E 2
130
Functions
Commands
Syntax
Keystrokes
Page
Advanced mode Basic mode
@@
@@
gg
gg
SOLVER/CALC
SOLVER (TVM SOLVER screen appears)
A E
185
slv_pmt slv_pmt
[(N, I%, PV, FV, P/Y, C/Y)]
B 0 1
189
slv_I% slv_I%
[(N, PV, PMT, FV, P/Y, C/Y)]
B 0 2
189
slv_PV slv_PV
[(N, I%, PMT, FV, P/Y, C/Y)]
B 0 3
189
slv_N slv_N
[(I%, PV, PMT, FV, P/Y, C/Y)]
B 0 4
189
slv_FV slv_FV
[(N, I%, PV, PMT, P/Y, C/Y)]
B 0 5
189
Npv(
Npv(
interest rate, initial investment, list of following
collected investment [, frequency list]
)
B 0 6
190
Functions
Commands
Syntax
Keystrokes
Page
Advanced mode Basic mode
263
Appendix
12. TOOL menus
Irr(
Irr(
initial investment, list of following collected
investment [, frequency list] [, assumed revenue
rate]
)
B 0 7
190
Bal(
Bal(
number of payments [, decimal place to
round]
)
B 0 8
191
Prn(
Prn(
initial number of payments, end number of
payments [, decimal place to round]
)
B 0 9
191
Int(
Int(
initial number of payments, end number of
payments [, decimal place to round]
)
B 1 0
191
Apr(
Apr(
effective interest rate, number of
settlements
)
B 1 1
192
Eff(
Eff(
nominal interest rate, number of
settlements
)
B 1 2
192
days(
days(
start month. day year, end month. day year
)
days(
day month. year, day month. year
)
B 1 3
192
@@
@@
gg
gg
PERIOD
PmtEnd No arguments
C 1
188
PmtBegin No arguments
C 2
188
@@
@@
gg
gg
VARS
N No arguments
D 1
193
I% No arguments
D 2
193
PV No arguments
D 3
193
PMT No arguments
D 4
193
FV No arguments
D 5
193
P/Y No arguments
D 6
193
C/Y No arguments
D 7
193
Functions
Commands
Syntax
Keystrokes
Page
Advanced mode Basic mode
@@
@@
VV
VV
N BASE/SYSTEM/POLY
NBASE No arguments
A E
81
2 No arguments
B 2
82
3 No arguments
B 3
82
4 No arguments
B 4
82
5 No arguments
B 5
82
Functions
Commands
Syntax
Keystrokes
Page
Advanced mode Basic mode
264
Appendix
13. SOLVER menus
6 No arguments
B 6
82
2 No arguments
C 2
82
3 No arguments
C 3
82
Functions
Commands
Syntax
Keystrokes
Page
Advanced mode Basic mode
@@
@@
''
''
(in the Solver mode) METHOD/EQTN/SAVE/RENAME
Equation No arguments
A 1
194
Newton No arguments
A 2
196
Graphic No arguments
A 3
198
EQTN No arguments
B
201
SAVE No arguments
C E
200
RENAME No arguments
D
200
Functions
Commands
Syntax
Keystrokes
Page
Advanced mode Basic mode
265
Appendix
INDEX
: (colon) ......................................................... 134, 214
(n-1)-based (Web), sequence ................................ 90
“, PRGM ................................................................ 207
1_Stats, CALC ...................................................... 150
2nd Function key .................................................... 18
2ndF key ......................................................... 5, 8, 18
2
x
, CALC ................................................................. 71
2_Stats, CALC ...................................................... 150
10
x
........................................................................... 43
χ
2
test, TEST ........................................................ 166
Int(, CALC .......................................................... 191
Prn(, CALC ........................................................ 191
Apr(, CALC ........................................................ 192
Eff(, CALC ......................................................... 192
A
A-LOCK key .............................................................. 5
abs( ......................................................................... 43
abs(, COMPLX ................................................... 79
abs(, NUM .......................................................... 73
Absolute value ................................................... 43
absolute value, COMPLX .................................. 79
Advanced keyboard ................................................ 66
Advanced Mode............................................... iii, 7, 9
ALPHA key ..................................................... 5, 8, 19
and, LOGIC ............................................................ 77
ANGLE .................................................................... 49
ANGLE, MATH ................................................... 76
ANOVA(, CALC ..................................................... 152
ANS key .................................................................. 40
ANSWER ............................................................ 26
Answer mode, changing the .............................. 12
Arc cosine ............................................................... 69
Arc sine ................................................................... 69
Arc tangent ............................................................. 69
arg(, COMPLX ........................................................ 79
augment(, OPE ............................................. 126, 138
Auto, SIMPLE ......................................................... 27
Auto, TABLE ..................................................... 100
Auto, ZOOM ....................................................... 53
AXIS, FORMAT ................................................. 63, 95
AxisOFF, FORMAT ............................................... 212
AxisON, FORMAT ................................................ 212
B
Bal(, CALC ............................................................ 191
Basic keyboard ................................................. 31, 50
Basic Mode ....................................................... ii, 7, 9
Battery, inserting ...................................................... 2
Battery, replacing the ....................................... 228
Binary, NBASE ....................................................... 81
Blank line, programming ...................................... 205
Box plot, Graph type ............................................ 155
Box, ZOOM ............................................................. 54
Braces ..................................................................... 40
BRNCH menu, Programming ....................... 209, 214
Broken line plot, Graph type ................................ 154
BS key ...................................................................... 6
C
CALC .......................................................... 42, 60, 70
CALC function .................................................... 93
CALC functions, financial ................................ 189
CALC key ............................................................. 5
CALC menu, STAT ........................................... 150
CALC, MATH ...................................................... 70
Calculation screen, entering the ............................ 11
CATALOG ............................................................... 41
cdfbin(, DISTRI ..................................................... 181
cdfF(, DISTRI ....................................................... 180
cdfgeo(, DISTRI .................................................... 182
cdfnorm(, DISTRI ................................................. 177
cdfpoi(, DISTRI ..................................................... 182
cdfT(, DISTRI ....................................................... 179
cdfχ
2
(, DISTRI ...................................................... 179
Circle(, DRAW ...................................................... 108
CL key ....................................................................... 6
CLIP key ................................................................... 6
ClrDraw, DRAW .................................................... 102
ClrG, SCRN .......................................................... 209
ClrList, OPE .......................................................... 159
ClrT, SCRN ........................................................... 209
Combination ........................................................... 48
Comma ................................................................... 38
Command, programming ..................................... 207
Common math function keys ................................. 21
Comparison operand, program ............................ 206
Complex conjugate, COMPLX ............................... 78
Complex number ................................................ 78
Complex number, available keys ....................... 80
Complex number, calculation ............................ 79
COMPLX, MATH ................................................ 78
compound interest ................................................ 186
Cumulative sum, CALC .......................................... 72
conj(, COMPLX ...................................................... 78
Connect, FORMAT ............................................... 212
266
Appendix
CONV ..................................................................... 48
CONV, MATH ..................................................... 74
Conversion ......................................................... 48
Conversion keys, fraction and decimal .............. 36
Conversion, coordinates ........................................ 74
COORD .................................................................. 26
COPY menu, programming .................................. 216
cos .......................................................................... 42
cos
-1
X, TRIG .......................................................... 97
cosecant, CALC ..................................................... 72
cosh X, HYP ........................................................... 97
cosh, CALC ............................................................ 72
cosh
-1
X, HYP ......................................................... 97
cosh
-1
, CALC .......................................................... 73
cosine ..................................................................... 68
cot
-1
......................................................................... 72
cotangent, CALC .................................................... 72
csc
-1
......................................................................... 72
cumul, OPE .................................................. 126, 137
cumulative matrix ............................................. 126
CURR, SLIDE SHOW .......................................... 118
Cursor ............................................................... 15, 16
Cursor appearance ............................................ 16
Cursor key ............................................................ 6
Cursor navigation ............................................... 17
CURSOR, FORMAT ........................................... 96
D
d/dx(, CALC ............................................................ 71
Data list operation, statistics ................................ 159
days(, CALC ......................................................... 192
Debugging, program ............................................. 219
Dec, ZOOM ............................................................ 54
Decimal (Real) ........................................................ 26
Decimal ........................................................ 49, 74
Decimal, NBASE ................................................ 81
Decimal, SETUP .............................................. 211
Default, ZOOM ....................................................... 54
Deg ......................................................................... 25
Deg, SETUP ..................................................... 210
Degree .......................................................... 49, 74
Degree, angle..................................................... 49
DEL key .................................................................... 6
DEL, SLIDE SHOW ......................................... 119
Delete files ....................................................... 224
det, MATH ............................................................. 129
df_list, OPE .......................................................... 137
Differential, CALC .................................................. 71
dim(, OPE ..................................................... 125, 136
DispG, SCRN ....................................................... 209
Display contrast, adjusting ....................................... 3
Display screen...................................................... 5
Display, clear the ................................................ 11
DispT, SCRN ........................................................ 209
DISTRI menu, STAT ............................................. 177
Distribution functions, statistics ....................... 177
Dot, FORMAT ....................................................... 212
DRAW ..................................................................... 61
DRAW function ................................................. 102
DRAW key ............................................................ 5
Draw, DRAW .................................................... 107
DrawInv, DRAW ............................................... 108
DrawOFF, ON/OFF .......................................... 111
DrawON, ON/OFF ............................................ 111
DRG ........................................................................ 25
Derivative, CALC .................................................... 71
E
EDIT, SLIDE SHOW ............................................. 118
Editing mode .......................................................... 17
EDITOR .................................................................. 26
Else, BRNCH ........................................................ 214
End, PRGM .......................................................... 208
EndIf, BRNCH ...................................................... 214
Eng ......................................................................... 25
Eng, SETUP ..................................................... 211
ENTER key ......................................................... 6, 33
ENTRY key ............................................................. 41
Equality ................................................................... 76
Equation ................................................................. 26
Equation method, SOLVER ............................. 194
Equation mode ................................................... 17
Equation, recalling a ........................................ 201
Equation, renaming a ....................................... 200
Equation, saving a ........................................... 200
EQVARS, VARS.................................................... 217
Error codes ........................................................... 235
Error messages .................................................. 28
Euler number ........................................................ 246
e
x
......................................................................... 69
e
x
, EXP ............................................................... 97
EXP, ZOOM ...................................................... 55, 97
Exponent ................................................................ 38
EXPRES, FORMAT .......................................... 63, 95
ExprOFF, FORMAT............................................... 211
ExprON, FORMAT ................................................ 211
267
Appendix
F
FACTOR, ZOOM .................................................... 55
Factorial .................................................................. 48
Factorial, PROB ................................................. 74
fill(, OPE ....................................................... 125, 136
FINANCE key ........................................................... 7
Financial features............................................. 183
Fix ........................................................................... 25
Fix, SETUP ...................................................... 211
FloatPt .................................................................... 25
FloatPT, SETUP ............................................... 211
Flow control, programming .................................. 214
Flow diagram, financial ........................................ 183
fmax(, CALC ........................................................... 71
fmin(, CALC ............................................................ 71
For, BRNCH .......................................................... 215
FORMAT ................................................................. 63
FORMAT key ........................................................ 5
FORMAT menu, programming ......................... 211
Format setting .................................................... 95
fpart ........................................................................ 44
Fraction calculation keys .............................. 7, 20, 35
Fraction, entering ............................................... 11
Frequency, setting the .......................................... 147
FSE ......................................................................... 25
Ftest2samp, TEST ................................................ 167
G
gcd( ......................................................................... 45
gcd(, NUM .......................................................... 73
Get, I/O ................................................................. 209
Gosub, BRNCH .................................................... 216
Goto, BRNCH ....................................................... 214
Grad ........................................................................ 25
Grad, SETUP ................................................... 210
GRAPH key ........................................................ 5, 53
Graph Equation window..................................... 51
Graph type, statistics ....................................... 153
Graphic method, SOLVER ............................... 198
Graphic parametric equation ............................. 87
Graphing sequences .......................................... 89
Greater than ........................................................... 76
Greatest common divisor ....................................... 45
GRID, FORMAT ................................................ 63, 95
GridOFF, FORMAT ........................................... 212
GridON, FORMAT ............................................ 212
G_DATA, DRAW ................................................... 112
G_DATA, VARS ..................................................... 217
H
Hard cover, using the ............................................... 3
Hexadecimal, NBASE ............................................ 81
Histogram, Graph type ......................................... 153
HYP, ZOOM ............................................................ 97
Hyperbolic cosine, CALC ....................................... 72
Hyperbolic sine, CALC ........................................... 72
Hyperbolic tangent, CALC ..................................... 72
H_line, DRAW ....................................................... 105
I
I/O menu, programming ....................................... 209
identity, OPE ......................................................... 126
If, BRNCH ............................................................. 214
image(, COMPLX ................................................... 79
Imaginary part, COMPLX ....................................... 79
imaginary number .............................................. 70
Improp, SETUP .................................................... 211
Improp (Real) ..................................................... 26
In, ZOOM ................................................................ 54
INEQ, MATH ........................................................... 76
Inequality ................................................................ 76
Infinite loop, programming ................................... 220
Inflec, CALC ........................................................... 94
INITIAL, SHADE ................................................... 114
Input method .......................................................... 16
Input, PRGM .................................................... 207
INS key ..................................................................... 6
Insert mode ........................................................ 17
int ............................................................................ 44
Int, NUM ............................................................. 73
Int, ZOOM .......................................................... 54
Integer ................................................................ 44
Integer division keys ...................................... 7, 37
Integer division ............................................. 20, 37
Integral, CALC ........................................................ 71
Intsct, CALC ........................................................... 60
Inverse cotangent, CALC ....................................... 72
Inverse cosecant, CALC ........................................ 72
Inverse hyperbolic cosine, CALC ........................... 73
Inverse hyperbolic sine, CALC ............................... 73
Inverse hyperbolic tangent, CALC ......................... 73
Inverse secant, CALC ............................................ 72
InvNorm(, DISTRI ................................................. 178
ipart ......................................................................... 44
ipart, NUM .......................................................... 73
Irr(, CALC ............................................................. 190
268
Appendix
K
Key, PRGM ........................................................... 208
Keyboard, changing the ........................................... 9
L
Label, BRNCH ...................................................... 214
lcm( ......................................................................... 45
lcm(, NUM .......................................................... 73
Least common multiple ...................................... 45
Less than ................................................................ 76
LimOFF, S_PLOT ................................................. 213
LimON, S_PLOT ................................................... 213
Line(, DRAW ......................................................... 103
LINE, DRAW .................................................... 112
Linking to another EL-9900 or PC ....................... 224
LIST key .................................................................... 6
List features...................................................... 131
List variable ........................................................ 80
listmatrix(, OPE .................................... 128, 138
List, creating a .................................................. 133
List, drawing multiple graphs ........................... 141
List, normal operations .................................... 133
List, special operations .................................... 135
List, Table ......................................................... 143
ln ............................................................................. 68
ln X, EXP ............................................................ 97
log ..................................................................... 43, 68
log
2
, CALC .......................................................... 70
Logarithm keys ................................................... 7, 68
LOGIC, MATH ......................................................... 77
L_DATA function, List ........................................... 142
L_DATA, VARS...................................................... 217
M
Manual, SIMPLE .................................................... 27
MATH menu ............................................................ 42
MATH menu key ............................................. 7, 23
MATH menu, List .............................................. 139
MATH menu, Matrix ......................................... 129
Math calculation ................................................. 15
MATRIX key .............................................................. 7
Matrix ................................................................ 120
matrixlist(, OPE .................................... 128, 138
Matrix, define dimensions ................................ 122
Matrix, editing keys and functions ................... 123
Matrix, entering a ............................................. 122
Matrix, entering manually ................................ 130
Matrix, normal calculations .............................. 124
Matrix, using in an expression ......................... 130
Matrix, viewing a .............................................. 122
max( ........................................................................ 45
max(, MATH ..................................................... 139
max(, NUM ......................................................... 73
Maximum value .................................................. 45
Maximum, CALC ................................................ 61
mean(, MATH........................................................ 139
median(, MATH..................................................... 140
Med_Med, REG .................................................... 160
Memory usage, checking the ............................... 222
min( ......................................................................... 45
min(, MATH ...................................................... 139
min(, NUM .......................................................... 73
Minimum value ................................................... 45
Minimum, CALC ................................................. 60
Minute, angle .......................................................... 49
Mixed (Real) ........................................................... 26
Mixed number, entering the ............................... 36
Mixed, SETUP.................................................. 211
Modified box type, Graph type ............................. 155
N
n-based (Time), sequence ..................................... 90
NBASE, TOOL ........................................................ 81
nCr .......................................................................... 48
nCr, PROB ......................................................... 74
neg, LOGIC ............................................................ 78
Negative value ........................................................ 34
Negative value, entering the .............................. 14
NEW, SLIDE SHOW ............................................. 118
Newton’s method, SOLVER ................................. 196
Next, BRNCH ....................................................... 215
Normal distribution plot, Graph type .................... 154
Normal probability plot, Graph type ..................... 154
not, LOGIC ............................................................. 77
nPr .......................................................................... 47
nPr, PROB .......................................................... 74
Npv(, CALC .......................................................... 190
NUM ........................................................................ 43
NUM, MATH ............................................................ 73
Numbers, entering .................................................. 14
O
Octal, NBASE ......................................................... 81
OFF, turn ................................................................... 3
ON/OFF, DRAW.................................................... 111
One-line mode .................................................. 17, 26
269
Appendix
OPE menu, List .................................................... 135
OPE menu, Matrix ............................................ 125
OPE menu, STAT ............................................. 159
Operand, programming ........................................ 206
OPTION key ............................................................. 6
OPTION Menu ................................................. 222
or, LOGIC ............................................................... 77
Out, ZOOM ............................................................. 54
P
Param ..................................................................... 26
Param, SETUP ................................................. 210
Parametric coordinate system, TABLE .................. 99
Parametric coordinate system, WINDOW ............. 98
Parentheses ..................................................... 15, 35
Payment due at the beginning of the period ....... 188
Payment due at the end of the period ................. 184
pdfbin(, DISTRI ..................................................... 181
pdfF(, DISTRI ....................................................... 180
pdfgeo(, DISTRI ................................................... 182
pdfnorm(, DISTRI ................................................. 177
pdfpoi(, DISTRI ..................................................... 181
pdfT(, DISTRI ....................................................... 178
pdfχ
2
(, DISTRI ...................................................... 179
Permutation ............................................................ 47
phase-based (uv, uw, vw), sequence .................... 91
PICT, DRAW ......................................................... 113
PICTUR, VARS ..................................................... 217
π ................................................................................ 41, 70
Pie chart, Graph type ........................................... 156
PLAY, SLIDE SHOW ............................................ 118
PlotOFF, S_PLOT ................................................. 213
PlotON, S_PLOT .................................................. 213
Plotting on/off, statistical graph............................ 157
Plt1(, S_PLOT ...................................................... 213
Plt2(, S_PLOT ...................................................... 213
Plt3(, S_PLOT ...................................................... 213
PntCHG(, POINT .................................................. 110
PntOFF(, POINT ................................................... 110
PntON(, POINT .................................................... 110
POINT, DRAW ...................................................... 109
Polar........................................................................ 26
Polar coordinate system, TABLE ..................... 100
Polar coordinate system, WINDOW .................. 98
Polar coordinate, CURSOR ............................... 96
Polar coordinates ............................................... 74
Polar graphing .................................................... 88
Polar, SETUP ................................................... 210
PolarCursor, FORMAT ..................................... 211
POLY, TOOL ........................................................... 82
Power ...................................................................... 69
Power ON/OFF key .................................................. 5
POWER, ZOOM ..................................................... 55
Precedence of calculation ...................................... 27
PreWin, ZOOM ....................................................... 56
PRGM menu key ................................................ 7, 23
PRGM menu, programming ............................. 207
Print, PRGM ......................................................... 207
PROB ...................................................................... 46
PROB, MATH ..................................................... 74
Probability .......................................................... 46
prod(, MATH ......................................................... 140
Program, blank line .............................................. 205
Program, changing a name ............................. 205
Program, copying ............................................. 205
Program, creating a ......................................... 202
Program, debugging ........................................ 219
Program, deleting a line ................................... 205
Program, entering a command ........................ 203
Program, entering an alphabet ........................ 203
Program, executing the .................................... 204
Program, operand ............................................ 206
Program, storing a ........................................... 205
Program, variable ............................................. 206
Programming command .................................. 207
Programming features ..................................... 202
Programming hints ........................................... 204
Programming, infinite loop ............................... 220
PxlCHG(, POINT .................................................. 110
PxlOFF(, POINT ................................................... 110
PxlON(, POINT ..................................................... 110
PxlTST(, POINT ................................................... 111
Q
QUIT key ................................................................... 6
R
r θ (Complex) ...................................................... 26
r θ, SETUP ................................................... 211
Rad ......................................................................... 25
Rad, SETUP ..................................................... 210
Radian ................................................................ 49
random .................................................................... 46
random, PROB ................................................... 74
RCL, ZOOM ............................................................ 56
RclGD, G_DATA.................................................... 112
270
Appendix
RclLD, L_DATA ..................................................... 143
RclPict, PICT ........................................................ 113
RclWin, ZOOM ....................................................... 56
Real part, COMPLX ............................................... 79
real(, COMPLX ................................................... 79
Recall, variable ....................................................... 40
Recalling a equation ........................................ 201
Rect ........................................................................ 26
Rect, SETUP .................................................... 210
Rectangular coordinate system, TABLE............ 99
Rectangular coordinate system, WINDOW ....... 98
Rectangular coordinate, CURSOR.................... 96
Rectangular coordinates .................................... 74
RectCursor, FORMAT ...................................... 211
REG menu, STAT ................................................. 160
Regression ....................................................... 145
Regression calculation .................................... 160
Regression function, using the ........................ 163
Rem, PRGM ......................................................... 208
remain ..................................................................... 46
Remainder .......................................................... 46
Remainder, division ........................................... 37
Renaming a equation ........................................... 200
Reset function, OPTION ...................................... 227
Reset switch ................................................... 6, 29
RESET, OPTION menu ..................................... 30
Resetting the calculator ..................................... 29
Residual list .......................................................... 165
Return, BRNCH .................................................... 216
Reversible Keyboard ................................................ ii
Rg_a+bx, REG ..................................................... 160
Rg_ab
x
, REG ........................................................ 161
Rg_ae
bx
, REG ....................................................... 161
Rg_ax+b, REG ..................................................... 160
Rg_ax
b
, REG ........................................................ 162
Rg_ln, REG .......................................................... 161
Rg_log, REG ........................................................ 161
Rg_logistic, REG .................................................. 162
Rg_sin, REG ......................................................... 162
Rg_x
-1
, REG ......................................................... 162
Rg_x
2
, REG .......................................................... 160
Rg_x
3
, REG .......................................................... 160
Rg_x
4
, REG .......................................................... 161
rndCoin ................................................................... 47
rndDice ................................................................... 47
rndInt( ..................................................................... 46
rndInt(, PROB .................................................... 74
rnd_mat(, OPE ..................................................... 126
Root .................................................................. 39, 70
round( ..................................................................... 44
round(, NUM ....................................................... 73
Rounded value ................................................... 44
rowEF, MATH ........................................................ 129
row_m.p.(, OPE .................................................... 127
row_mult(, OPE .................................................... 127
row_plus(, OPE .................................................... 127
row_swap(, OPE ................................................... 127
rrowEF, MATH ....................................................... 129
S
Saving a equation ................................................ 200
Scatter diagram, Graph type ................................ 156
Sci ........................................................................... 25
Sci, SETUP ...................................................... 211
Screen contrast, adjusting the ............................. 222
SCRN menu, programming .................................. 209
sec
-1
........................................................................ 72
secant, CALC ......................................................... 72
Second, angle ........................................................ 49
SELECT menu, OPTION ..................................... 225
SELECT, SLIDE SHOW ....................................... 118
Send, I/O .............................................................. 209
Seq ......................................................................... 26
seq(, OPE ......................................................... 137
Sequen, FORMAT ............................................ 212
Sequential coordinate system, TABLE ............ 100
Sequential coordinate system, WINDOW ......... 98
SET, SHADE......................................................... 114
SetList, OPE ......................................................... 159
SETUP key ......................................................... 6, 24
SETUP menu ............................................... 25, 83
SETUP menu, programming ........................... 210
Sexagesimal ........................................................... 48
SHADE, DRAW .................................................... 114
Shade(, DRAW ................................................. 107
Simp key ................................................................. 35
SIMPLE .............................................................. 27
simple interest .................................................. 186
Simul, FORMAT .................................................... 212
sin ........................................................................... 42
sin
-1
X, TRIG ........................................................... 97
sine ......................................................................... 68
sinh X, HYP ............................................................ 97
sinh, CALC ............................................................. 72
sinh
-1
X, HYP .......................................................... 97
sinh
-1
, CALC ........................................................... 73
271
Appendix
SLIDE SHOW ....................................................... 115
SLIDE SHOW key ................................................ 6
SLIDE SHOW menu ......................................... 118
slv_FV, CALC ....................................................... 189
slv_I%, CALC ....................................................... 189
slv_N, CALC ......................................................... 189
slv_pmt, CALC ..................................................... 189
slv_PV, CALC ....................................................... 189
SOLVER feature ................................................... 194
SOLVER, equation method.............................. 194
SOLVER function, Financial ............................ 185
SOLVER, graphic method ................................ 198
SOLVER, Newton’s method ............................. 196
SOLVER key......................................................... 7
sortA(, OPE .................................................. 135, 159
sortD(, OPE .................................................. 135, 159
Specifications ....................................................... 233
SPLIT ...................................................................... 58
SPLIT key ............................................................. 5
Square .................................................................... 37
Square, ZOOM ................................................... 54
Standard deviation ............................................... 141
STAT menu ........................................................... 149
STAT menu key .............................................. 7, 23
STAT PLOT key .................................................... 6
STAT, VARS ...................................................... 217
Stat, ZOOM ........................................................ 54
Statistical graph functions ............................... 157
Statistical graph, plotting on/off ....................... 157
Statistical graph, specifying ............................. 157
Statistical graph, trancing the .......................... 158
Statistical hypothesis testing ........................... 165
Statistics ........................................................... 145
Statistics, graphing .......................................... 153
Statistics, opening the list table ....................... 145
Statistics, plotting ............................................. 147
Statistics features ............................................ 149
stdDv(, MATH ....................................................... 141
STO key .................................................................. 38
STO, ZOOM ....................................................... 56
StoGD, G_DATA ............................................... 112
StoLD, L_DATA ................................................. 142
StoPict, PICT ................................................... 113
STOWIN, VARS ................................................ 217
SUB key .............................................................. 5, 63
Substitution ........................................................ 63
Substitution feature (Advanced) ...................... 114
sum(, MATH .......................................................... 140
SYSTEM, TOOL ..................................................... 82
S_PLOT menu, programming .............................. 213
T
TA B ......................................................................... 26
Tab, SETUP .......................................................... 211
TABLE key .......................................................... 5, 53
TABLE, VARS ................................................... 217
Table, editing the list ........................................ 144
Table, entering the list ...................................... 143
Table, List ......................................................... 143
Table, setting a ................................................. 100
Tables ................................................................. 99
tan ........................................................................... 43
tan
-1
X, TRIG ........................................................... 97
tangent .................................................................... 68
tanh X, HYP ............................................................ 97
tanh, CALC ............................................................. 72
tanh
-1
X, HYP .......................................................... 97
tanh
-1
, CALC ........................................................... 73
TBLSET key ............................................................. 5
TEST menu, STAT ................................................ 165
Text(, DRAW ......................................................... 109
Then, BRNCH ....................................................... 214
Time, SETUP ........................................................ 210
Time, TYPE ........................................................ 96
Tint1samp, TEST .................................................. 170
Tint2samp, TEST .................................................. 170
TOOL key .................................................................. 7
TOOL menu........................................................ 81
TRACE .................................................................... 57
TRACE key ........................................................... 5
Trace function, statistical graph ....................... 158
trans, MATH .......................................................... 129
TRIG, ZOOM .................................................... 56, 97
Trigonometric keys .......................... 7, 20, 21, 68, 69
Trouble shooting ................................................... 231
Ttest1samp, TEST ................................................ 167
Ttest2samp, TEST ................................................ 168
TtestLinreg, TEST ................................................ 169
TYPE, FORMAT ..................................................... 96
T_line(, DRAW ...................................................... 106
U
User, TABLE ......................................................... 101
uv, SETUP ............................................................ 210
uv, TYPE ................................................................. 96
uw, SETUP ........................................................... 210
272
Appendix
uw, TYPE ................................................................ 96
V
Value, CALC ........................................................... 60
Var iable, programming ......................................... 206
Var iable, store .................................................... 38
varian(, MATH ....................................................... 141
Variance ........................................................... 141
VARS key ............................................................ 7, 40
VARS menu, financial ...................................... 193
VARS menu, programming .............................. 217
vw, SETUP ........................................................... 210
vw, TYPE ................................................................ 96
V_line(, DRAW ..................................................... 105
W
Wait, PRGM .......................................................... 208
Web, SETUP ........................................................ 210
Web, TYPE ......................................................... 96
WEnd, BRNCH ..................................................... 215
While, BRNCH ...................................................... 215
WINDOW ................................................................ 57
WINDOW key ....................................................... 5
WINDOW, setting the ....................................... 148
WINDOW, VARS .............................................. 217
Window, setting a ............................................... 98
X
x’, REG ................................................................. 163
xnor, LOGIC ........................................................... 78
xor, LOGIC .............................................................. 78
XY Line, Graph type ............................................. 156
X_Incpt, CALC ........................................................ 61
x±yi (Complex) ....................................................... 26
X±yi, SETUP ........................................................ 211
Y
Y’, FORMAT...................................................... 63, 95
y’, REG ................................................................. 163
Y’OFF, FORMAT ................................................... 211
Y’ON, FORMAT .................................................... 211
Y= key ....................................................................... 5
Y_Incpt, CALC ........................................................ 61
Z
Zint1prop, TEST ................................................... 175
Zint1samp, TEST .................................................. 174
Zint2prop, TEST ................................................... 176
Zint2samp, TEST .................................................. 175
ZOOM ..................................................................... 53
ZOOM key ............................................................ 5
Zoom Functions ................................................. 96
Ztest1prop, TEST ................................................. 173
Ztest1samp, TEST ................................................ 171
Ztest2prop, TEST ................................................. 173
Ztest2samp, TEST ................................................ 172
This equipment complies with the requirements of Directive 89/336/EEC as
amended by 93/68/EEC.
Dieses Gerät entspricht den Anforderungen der EG-Richtlinie 89/336/EWG mit
Änderung 93/68/EWG.
Ce matériel répond aux exigences contenues dans la directive 89/336/CEE
modifiée par la directive 93/68/CEE.
Dit apparaat voldoet aan de eisen van de richtlijn 89/336/EEG, gewijzigd door
93/68/EEG.
Dette udstyr overholder kravene i direktiv nr. 89/336/EEC med tillæg nr. 93/68/
EEC.
Quest’apparecchio è conforme ai requisiti della direttiva 89/336/EEC come
emendata dalla direttiva 93/68/EEC.
ÂÁηٿÛÙ·ÛË ·˘Ù‹ ·ÓÙ·ÔÎÚ›ÓÂÙ·È ÛÙȘ ··ÈÙ‹ÛÂȘ ÙˆÓ Ô‰ËÁÈÒÓ Ù˘
˘Úˆ·˚΋˜ ÓˆÛ˘ 89/336/∂√∫, ˆ˜ Ô Î·ÓÔÓÈÛ̘ ·˘Ù˜ Û˘ÌÏËÚÒıËÎÂ
· ÙËÓ Ô‰ËÁ›· 93/68/∂√∫.
Este equipamento obedece às exigências da directiva 89/336/CEE na sua
versão corrigida pela directiva 93/68/CEE.
Este aparato satisface las exigencias de la Directiva 89/336/CEE, modificada por
medio de la 93/68/CEE.
Denna utrustning uppfyller kraven enligt riktlinjen 89/336/EEC så som
kompletteras av 93/68/EEC.
Dette produktet oppfyller betingelsene i direktivet 89/336/EEC i endringen 93/68/
EEC.
Tämä laite täyttää direktiivin 89/336/EEC vaatimukset, jota on muutettu
direktiivillä 93/68/EEC.
In Europe:
In Canada: Au Canada:
This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.
Cet appareil numérique de la classe B est conforme à la norme NMB-
003 du Canada.
NOTE: FOR NETHERLANDS ONLY
EL-9900
MODEL
EL-9900 GRAPHING CALCULATOR
GRAPHING CALCULATOR
OPERATION MANUAL
SHARP CORPORATION
02CGK(TINSE0511EHZZ)
PRINTED IN CHINA/IMPRIMÉ EN CHINE/IMPRESO EN CHINA
®
®
282

Hulp nodig? Stel uw vraag in het forum

Spelregels

Misbruik melden

Gebruikershandleiding.com neemt misbruik van zijn services uitermate serieus. U kunt hieronder aangeven waarom deze vraag ongepast is. Wij controleren de vraag en zonodig wordt deze verwijderd.

Product:

Bijvoorbeeld antisemitische inhoud, racistische inhoud, of materiaal dat gewelddadige fysieke handelingen tot gevolg kan hebben.

Bijvoorbeeld een creditcardnummer, een persoonlijk identificatienummer, of een geheim adres. E-mailadressen en volledige namen worden niet als privégegevens beschouwd.

Spelregels forum

Om tot zinvolle vragen te komen hanteren wij de volgende spelregels:

Belangrijk! Als er een antwoord wordt gegeven op uw vraag, dan is het voor de gever van het antwoord nuttig om te weten als u er wel (of niet) mee geholpen bent! Wij vragen u dus ook te reageren op een antwoord.

Belangrijk! Antwoorden worden ook per e-mail naar abonnees gestuurd. Laat uw emailadres achter op deze site, zodat u op de hoogte blijft. U krijgt dan ook andere vragen en antwoorden te zien.

Abonneren

Abonneer u voor het ontvangen van emails voor uw Sharp EL9900 bij:


U ontvangt een email met instructies om u voor één of beide opties in te schrijven.


Ontvang uw handleiding per email

Vul uw emailadres in en ontvang de handleiding van Sharp EL9900 in de taal/talen: Engels als bijlage per email.

De handleiding is 4,88 mb groot.

 

U ontvangt de handleiding per email binnen enkele minuten. Als u geen email heeft ontvangen, dan heeft u waarschijnlijk een verkeerd emailadres ingevuld of is uw mailbox te vol. Daarnaast kan het zijn dat uw internetprovider een maximum heeft aan de grootte per email. Omdat hier een handleiding wordt meegestuurd, kan het voorkomen dat de email groter is dan toegestaan bij uw provider.

Stel vragen via chat aan uw handleiding

Stel uw vraag over deze PDF

Uw handleiding is per email verstuurd. Controleer uw email

Als u niet binnen een kwartier uw email met handleiding ontvangen heeft, kan het zijn dat u een verkeerd emailadres heeft ingevuld of dat uw emailprovider een maximum grootte per email heeft ingesteld die kleiner is dan de grootte van de handleiding.

Er is een email naar u verstuurd om uw inschrijving definitief te maken.

Controleer uw email en volg de aanwijzingen op om uw inschrijving definitief te maken

U heeft geen emailadres opgegeven

Als u de handleiding per email wilt ontvangen, vul dan een geldig emailadres in.

Uw vraag is op deze pagina toegevoegd

Wilt u een email ontvangen bij een antwoord en/of nieuwe vragen? Vul dan hier uw emailadres in.



Info